ZyXEL Communications 5VZ-A2011 Wireless router with VDSL2/ADSL broadband access User Manual ZyBook2
ZyXEL Communications Corporation Wireless router with VDSL2/ADSL broadband access ZyBook2
user manual
CellPipe 7130 RG Wireless router with VDSL2/ADSL broadband access Default Login Details IP Address http://192.168.1.1 User Name admin root tech Password telus www.zyxel.com Firmware Version 0.0.02.GEN Copyright © 2010 About This User's Guide About This User's Guide Intended Audience This manual is intended for people who want to configure the CellPipe 7130 RG using the web configurator. Related Documentation Quick Start Guide The Quick Start Guide is designed to help you get up and running right away. It contains information on setting up your network and configuring for Internet access. CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide Document Conventions Document Conventions Warnings and Notes These are how warnings and notes are shown in this User’s Guide. Warnings tell you about things that could harm you or your device. Note: Notes tell you other important information (for example, other things you may need to configure or helpful tips) or recommendations. Syntax Conventions • The CellPipe 7130 RG may be referred to as the “CellPipe 7130 RG”, the “device”, the “system” or the “product” in this User’s Guide. • Product labels, screen names, field labels and field choices are all in bold font. • A key stroke is denoted by square brackets and uppercase text, for example, [ENTER] means the “enter” or “return” key on your keyboard. • “Enter” means for you to type one or more characters and then press the [ENTER] key. “Select” or “choose” means for you to use one of the predefined choices. • A right angle bracket ( > ) within a screen name denotes a mouse click. For example, Maintenance > Log > Log Setting means you first click Maintenance in the navigation panel, then the Log sub menu and finally the Log Setting tab to get to that screen. • Units of measurement may denote the “metric” value or the “scientific” value. For example, “k” for kilo may denote “1000” or “1024”, “M” for mega may denote “1000000” or “1048576” and so on. • “e.g.,” is a shorthand for “for instance”, and “i.e.,” means “that is” or “in other words”. CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide Document Conventions Icons Used in Figures Figures in this User’s Guide may use the following generic icons. The CellPipe 7130 RG icon is not an exact representation of your device. CellPipe 7130 RG Computer Notebook computer Server DSLAM Firewall Telephone Switch Router CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide Safety Warnings Safety Warnings • Do NOT use this product near water, for example, in a wet basement or near a swimming pool. • Do NOT expose your device to dampness, dust or corrosive liquids. • Do NOT store things on the device. • Do NOT install, use, or service this device during a thunderstorm. There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning. • Connect ONLY suitable accessories to the device. • Do NOT open the device or unit. Opening or removing covers can expose you to dangerous high voltage points or other risks. ONLY qualified service personnel should service or disassemble this device. Please contact your vendor for further information. • Make sure to connect the cables to the correct ports. • Place connecting cables carefully so that no one will step on them or stumble over them. • Always disconnect all cables from this device before servicing or disassembling. • Use ONLY an appropriate power adaptor or cord for your device. • Connect the power adaptor or cord to the right supply voltage (for example, 110V AC in North America or 230V AC in Europe). • Do NOT allow anything to rest on the power adaptor or cord and do NOT place the product where anyone can walk on the power adaptor or cord. • Do NOT use the device if the power adaptor or cord is damaged as it might cause electrocution. • If the power adaptor or cord is damaged, remove it from the device and the power source. • Do NOT attempt to repair the power adaptor or cord. Contact your local vendor to order a new one. • Do not use the device outside, and make sure all the connections are indoors. There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning. • Do NOT obstruct the device ventilation slots, as insufficient airflow may harm your device. • Use only No. 26 AWG (American Wire Gauge) or larger telecommunication line cord. • Antenna Warning! This device meets ETSI and FCC certification requirements when using the included antenna(s). Only use the included antenna(s). • If you wall mount your device, make sure that no electrical lines, gas or water pipes will be damaged. Your product is marked with this symbol, which is known as the WEEE mark. WEEE stands for Waste Electronics and Electrical Equipment. It means that used electrical and electronic products should not be mixed with general waste. Used electrical and electronic equipment should be treated separately. CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide Contents Overview Contents Overview User’s Guide ........................................................................................................................... 17 Introducing the CellPipe 7130 RG ............................................................................................. 19 Tutorials ..................................................................................................................................... 29 Introducing the Web Configurator .............................................................................................. 83 Technical Reference .............................................................................................................. 89 Status Screens .......................................................................................................................... 91 WAN Setup .............................................................................................................................. 101 LAN Setup ............................................................................................................................... 131 Wireless LAN ........................................................................................................................... 139 Network Address Translation (NAT) ........................................................................................ 171 File Sharing ............................................................................................................................. 181 Media Server ........................................................................................................................... 187 Firewall .................................................................................................................................... 191 Certificate ................................................................................................................................ 197 Static Route ............................................................................................................................. 209 Policy Forwarding .................................................................................................................... 213 RIP ........................................................................................................................................... 217 Quality of Service (QoS) .......................................................................................................... 219 Dynamic DNS Setup ................................................................................................................ 237 Remote Management .............................................................................................................. 239 Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP) ............................................................................................. 245 Parental Control ....................................................................................................................... 257 IGMP ....................................................................................................................................... 261 System Settings ....................................................................................................................... 267 Logs ........................................................................................................................................ 271 Tools ........................................................................................................................................ 275 Diagnostic ................................................................................................................................ 283 Troubleshooting ....................................................................................................................... 289 Product Specifications ............................................................................................................. 297 CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide Contents Overview CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide Table of Contents Table of Contents About This User's Guide .......................................................................................................... 3 Document Conventions............................................................................................................ 4 Safety Warnings........................................................................................................................ 6 Contents Overview ................................................................................................................... 7 Table of Contents...................................................................................................................... 9 Part I: User’s Guide................................................................................ 17 Chapter 1 Introducing the CellPipe 7130 RG ......................................................................................... 19 1.1 Overview .............................................................................................................................. 19 1.2 Ways to Manage the CellPipe 7130 RG .............................................................................. 19 1.3 Good Habits for Managing the CellPipe 7130 RG ............................................................... 20 1.4 Applications for the CellPipe 7130 RG ............................................................................... 20 1.4.1 Internet Access .......................................................................................................... 20 1.4.2 HomePNA .................................................................................................................. 22 1.4.3 CellPipe 7130 RG’s USB Support .............................................................................. 22 1.5 Hardware Connections ........................................................................................................ 24 1.6 LEDs (Lights) ....................................................................................................................... 26 1.7 The RESET Button .............................................................................................................. 28 1.8 The WLAN Button ................................................................................................................ 28 1.9 The WPS Button .................................................................................................................. 28 Chapter 2 Tutorials ................................................................................................................................... 29 2.1 Overview .............................................................................................................................. 29 2.2 How to Set up a Wireless Network ...................................................................................... 29 2.2.1 Example Parameters .................................................................................................. 30 2.2.2 Configuring the AP ..................................................................................................... 30 2.2.3 Configuring the Wireless Client .................................................................................. 32 2.3 HomePNA Example Setup .................................................................................................. 39 2.4 How to Use ATM QoS with Multiple PVCs ........................................................................... 40 2.4.1 Configuring PVCs ....................................................................................................... 41 2.4.2 Setting Policy Forwarding .......................................................................................... 51 CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide Table of Contents 2.5 How to Allow Out-of-band Remote Management from the WAN ......................................... 53 2.5.1 Configuring Multiple WAN Connections ..................................................................... 54 2.5.2 Configuring Remote Management ............................................................................. 64 2.5.3 Testing the Connection ............................................................................................... 65 2.6 Using the Media Server Feature ......................................................................................... 65 2.6.1 Configuring the CellPipe 7130 RG ............................................................................. 65 2.6.2 Using Windows Media Player .................................................................................... 66 2.6.3 Using a Digital Media Adapter .................................................................................... 69 2.7 Using the File Sharing Feature ............................................................................................ 71 2.7.1 Set Up File Sharing .................................................................................................... 71 2.7.2 Access Your Shared Files From a Computer ............................................................. 71 2.8 Setting Up NAT Port Forwarding ......................................................................................... 72 2.9 Configuring Static Route for Routing to Another Network ................................................... 74 2.10 Configuring QoS Queue and Class Setup ......................................................................... 77 2.11 Access the CellPipe 7130 RG Using DDNS ...................................................................... 80 2.11.1 Registering a DDNS Account on www.dyndns.org ................................................... 81 2.11.2 Configuring DDNS on Your CellPipe 7130 RG ......................................................... 81 2.11.3 Testing the DDNS Setting ......................................................................................... 82 Chapter 3 Introducing the Web Configurator ........................................................................................ 83 3.1 Overview .............................................................................................................................. 83 3.2 User Levels .......................................................................................................................... 83 3.2.1 Accessing the Web Configurator ................................................................................ 84 3.3 Web Configurator Main Screen ........................................................................................... 85 3.3.1 Navigation Panel ........................................................................................................ 86 3.3.2 Main Window .............................................................................................................. 88 3.3.3 Status Bar ................................................................................................................... 88 Part II: Technical Reference .................................................................. 89 Chapter 4 Status Screens ........................................................................................................................ 91 4.1 Overview .............................................................................................................................. 91 4.2 Status Screen ...................................................................................................................... 91 4.2.1 WAN Service Statistics ............................................................................................... 94 4.2.2 Route Info ................................................................................................................... 96 4.2.3 WLAN Station List ...................................................................................................... 97 4.2.4 LAN Statistics ............................................................................................................. 98 4.2.5 Client List ................................................................................................................... 99 10 CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide Table of Contents Chapter 5 WAN Setup............................................................................................................................. 101 5.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................ 101 5.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ............................................................................ 102 5.2 What You Need to Know .................................................................................................... 103 5.3 Before You Begin ............................................................................................................... 104 5.4 The Mode Screen .............................................................................................................. 104 5.5 The Connect Screen .......................................................................................................... 105 5.5.1 Connect Configuration ............................................................................................. 107 5.6 The Services Screen ..........................................................................................................110 5.6.1 WAN Connection Configuration ................................................................................112 5.7 Technical Reference .......................................................................................................... 123 Chapter 6 LAN Setup.............................................................................................................................. 131 6.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................ 131 6.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ............................................................................ 131 6.2 What You Need To Know ................................................................................................... 132 6.3 The LAN IP Screen ............................................................................................................ 133 6.4 Technical Reference .......................................................................................................... 134 Chapter 7 Wireless LAN......................................................................................................................... 139 7.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................ 139 7.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ............................................................................ 139 7.2 What You Need to Know .................................................................................................... 140 7.3 Before You Begin ............................................................................................................... 142 7.4 The General Screen ......................................................................................................... 143 7.4.1 No Security ............................................................................................................... 145 7.4.2 WEP Encryption ....................................................................................................... 146 7.4.3 WPA(2)-PSK ............................................................................................................ 147 7.4.4 WPA(2) Authentication ............................................................................................. 148 7.4.5 MAC Filter ........................................................................................................... 150 7.4.6 Adding a New MAC Filtering Rule ....................................................................... 151 7.5 The More AP Screen ........................................................................................................ 152 7.5.1 More AP Edit ............................................................................................................ 153 7.6 The WPS Screen .............................................................................................................. 153 7.7 The WPS Station Screen .................................................................................................. 155 7.8 The WDS Screen .............................................................................................................. 156 7.9 The Advanced Setup Screen ............................................................................................ 158 7.10 Technical Reference ........................................................................................................ 159 7.10.1 Wireless Network Overview ................................................................................... 160 7.10.2 Additional Wireless Terms ...................................................................................... 161 CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 11 Table of Contents 7.10.3 Wireless Security Overview ................................................................................... 161 7.10.4 WiFi Protected Setup ............................................................................................. 163 Chapter 8 Network Address Translation (NAT).................................................................................... 171 8.1 Overview ........................................................................................................................... 171 8.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ............................................................................ 171 8.2 What You Need to Know .................................................................................................... 171 8.3 The Port Forwarding Screen ............................................................................................. 172 8.3.1 The Port Forwarding Edit Screen ............................................................................ 175 8.4 The DMZ Host Screen ....................................................................................................... 176 8.5 The ALG Screen ............................................................................................................... 177 8.6 Technical Reference .......................................................................................................... 178 Chapter 9 File Sharing ........................................................................................................................... 181 9.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................ 181 9.1.1 What You Can Do in this chapter ............................................................................. 181 9.1.2 What You Need to Know About File-Sharing ........................................................... 182 9.1.3 Before You Begin ..................................................................................................... 183 9.2 The Server Settings Screen ............................................................................................. 183 9.2.1 Example of Accessing Your Shared Files From a Computer ................................... 184 Chapter 10 Media Server.......................................................................................................................... 187 10.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................... 187 10.1.1 What You Can Do in this chapter ........................................................................... 188 10.1.2 Before You Begin ................................................................................................... 188 10.2 The Media Server Configuration Screen ........................................................................ 188 10.3 The Remove Disk Safely Screen .................................................................................... 189 Chapter 11 Firewall................................................................................................................................... 191 11.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................... 191 11.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ........................................................................... 191 11.2 What You Need to Know .................................................................................................. 191 11.3 The Firewall Screen ......................................................................................................... 193 11.3.1 Creating Incoming Firewall Rules ......................................................................... 194 11.4 The DoS Screen .............................................................................................................. 195 Chapter 12 Certificate .............................................................................................................................. 197 12.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................... 197 12 CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide Table of Contents 12.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter .......................................................................... 197 12.2 What You Need to Know .................................................................................................. 197 12.3 The Local Certificates Screen ......................................................................................... 198 12.3.1 Create Certificate Request .................................................................................... 199 12.3.2 Import Certificate ................................................................................................... 200 12.3.3 Certificate Details .................................................................................................. 202 12.3.4 Load Signed Certificate .......................................................................................... 203 12.4 The Trusted CA Screen ................................................................................................... 204 12.4.1 View Trusted CA Certificate ................................................................................... 206 12.4.2 Import Trusted CA Certificate ................................................................................. 207 Chapter 13 Static Route ........................................................................................................................... 209 13.1 Overview ....................................................................................................................... 209 13.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter .......................................................................... 209 13.2 The Static Route Screen .................................................................................................. 210 13.2.1 Static Route Edit ....................................................................................................211 Chapter 14 Policy Forwarding................................................................................................................. 213 14.1 Overview ....................................................................................................................... 213 14.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter .......................................................................... 213 14.2 The Static Route Screen .................................................................................................. 213 14.2.1 Policy Forwarding Setup ...................................................................................... 214 Chapter 15 RIP .......................................................................................................................................... 217 15.1 Overview ....................................................................................................................... 217 15.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter .......................................................................... 217 15.2 The RIP Screen ............................................................................................................... 217 Chapter 16 Quality of Service (QoS)....................................................................................................... 219 16.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................... 219 16.1.1 QoS Overview ........................................................................................................ 220 16.1.2 What You Can Do in this Chapter .......................................................................... 220 16.2 What You Need to Know .................................................................................................. 220 16.3 The Quality of Service General Screen .......................................................................... 221 16.4 The Queue Setup Screen ................................................................................................ 222 16.4.1 Adding a QoS Queue ............................................................................................ 224 16.5 The Class Setup Screen ................................................................................................ 225 16.5.1 QoS Class Edit ...................................................................................................... 227 16.6 The Policer Setup Screen CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide ............................................................................................ 231 13 Table of Contents 16.6.1 Policer Setup Edit ................................................................................................... 232 16.7 The QoS Monitor Screen ................................................................................................ 233 16.8 Technical Reference ........................................................................................................ 233 Chapter 17 Dynamic DNS Setup ............................................................................................................. 237 17.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................... 237 17.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter .......................................................................... 237 17.2 What You Need To Know ................................................................................................. 237 17.3 The Dynamic DNS Screen .............................................................................................. 238 Chapter 18 Remote Management............................................................................................................ 239 18.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................... 239 18.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter .......................................................................... 239 18.2 The TR-069 Screen ......................................................................................................... 239 18.3 The TR-064 Screen ......................................................................................................... 241 18.4 The Service Control Screen ............................................................................................ 242 18.5 The IP Address Screen ................................................................................................... 243 18.5.1 Adding an IP Address ............................................................................................ 244 Chapter 19 Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP).......................................................................................... 245 19.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................... 245 19.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter .......................................................................... 245 19.2 What You Need to Know .................................................................................................. 245 19.3 The UPnP Screen ............................................................................................................ 246 19.4 Installing UPnP in Windows Example .............................................................................. 247 19.5 Using UPnP in Windows XP Example ............................................................................. 250 Chapter 20 Parental Control .................................................................................................................... 257 20.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................... 257 20.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter .......................................................................... 257 20.2 The Time Restriction Screen ........................................................................................... 257 20.2.1 Adding a Schedule ................................................................................................. 258 20.3 The Content Filter Screen ............................................................................................... 259 20.3.1 Adding Filter Rule ................................................................................................... 260 Chapter 21 IGMP....................................................................................................................................... 261 21.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................... 261 21.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter .......................................................................... 261 14 CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide Table of Contents 21.1.2 What You Need to Know ........................................................................................ 261 21.2 The IGMP Screen ............................................................................................................ 263 21.3 Interface Source Configuration ........................................................................................ 265 21.3.1 Add/Edit IGMP Source ........................................................................................... 266 Chapter 22 System Settings .................................................................................................................... 267 22.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................... 267 22.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter .......................................................................... 267 22.2 The General Screen ........................................................................................................ 267 22.3 The Time Setting Screen ................................................................................................ 269 Chapter 23 Logs ...................................................................................................................................... 271 23.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................... 271 23.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter .......................................................................... 271 23.2 The View Log Screen ...................................................................................................... 271 23.3 The Log Settings Screen ................................................................................................. 272 Chapter 24 Tools....................................................................................................................................... 275 24.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................... 275 24.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter .......................................................................... 275 24.2 The Firmware Screen ...................................................................................................... 276 24.3 The Configuration Screen ................................................................................................ 278 24.4 The Restart Screen ......................................................................................................... 280 Chapter 25 Diagnostic.............................................................................................................................. 283 25.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................... 283 25.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter .......................................................................... 283 25.2 What You Need to Know .................................................................................................. 283 25.3 The General Diagnostic Screen ...................................................................................... 284 25.4 The 802.1ag Screen ........................................................................................................ 285 25.5 The OAM Ping Test Screen ............................................................................................. 287 Chapter 26 Troubleshooting.................................................................................................................... 289 26.1 Power, Hardware Connections, and LEDs ...................................................................... 289 26.2 CellPipe 7130 RG Access and Login .............................................................................. 290 26.3 Internet Access ................................................................................................................ 292 26.4 USB Device Connection .................................................................................................. 295 26.5 Wireless LAN Troubleshooting ........................................................................................ 295 CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 15 Table of Contents Chapter 27 Product Specifications ......................................................................................................... 297 27.1 Hardware Specifications .................................................................................................. 297 27.2 Firmware Specifications ................................................................................................... 298 Appendix A Network Troubleshooting .................................................................................. 305 Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer’s IP Address ........................................................... 321 Appendix C Pop-up Windows, JavaScripts and Java Permissions ...................................... 351 Appendix D IP Addresses and Subnetting ........................................................................... 361 Appendix E Wireless LANs .................................................................................................. 373 Appendix F Common Services............................................................................................. 389 Appendix G Legal Information.............................................................................................. 393 Index....................................................................................................................................... 397 16 CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide P ART I User’s Guide 17 18 CHAPTER Introducing the CellPipe 7130 RG 1.1 Overview The CellPipe 7130 RG is a wireless VDSL2+ router and Gigabit Ethernet gateway with Home Phoneline Networking Alliance (HPNA) capability. It has a DSL port for super-fast Internet access over analog (POTS) telephone lines and a Giga Ethernet port high-speed Internet access through cable. The CellPipe 7130 RG supports bothPacket Transfer Mode (PTM) and Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM). It is backward compatible with ADSL, ADSL2 and ADSL2+ in case VDSL is not available. Only use firmware for your CellPipe 7130 RG’s specific model. Refer to the label on the bottom of your CellPipe 7130 RG. The CellPipe 7130 RG has a a USB port used to share files via a USB memory stick or a USB hard drive. The CellPipe 7130 RG can also function as a media server to let other users in the network open media files stored in the USB device. See Chapter 27 on page 297 for a full list of features. 1.2 Ways to Manage the CellPipe 7130 RG Use any of the following methods to manage the CellPipe 7130 RG. • Web Configurator. This is recommended for everyday management of the CellPipe 7130 RG using a (supported) web browser. • TR-069. This is an auto-configuration server used to remotely configure your device. CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 19 Chapter 1 Introducing the CellPipe 7130 RG 1.3 Good Habits for Managing the CellPipe 7130 RG Do the following things regularly to make the CellPipe 7130 RG more secure and to manage the CellPipe 7130 RG more effectively. • Change the password. Use a password that’s not easy to guess and that consists of different types of characters, such as numbers and letters. • Write down the password and put it in a safe place. • Back up the configuration (and make sure you know how to restore it). Restoring an earlier working configuration may be useful if the device becomes unstable or even crashes. If you forget your password, you will have to reset the CellPipe 7130 RG to its factory default settings. If you backed up an earlier configuration file, you would not have to totally re-configure the CellPipe 7130 RG. You could simply restore your last configuration. 1.4 Applications for the CellPipe 7130 RG Here are some example uses for which the CellPipe 7130 RG is well suited. 1.4.1 Internet Access Your CellPipe 7130 RG provides shared Internet access by connecting the DSL port to the DSL or MODEM jack on a splitter or your telephone jack. You can have up to eight WAN services over one ADSL, VDSL or Ethernet WAN line. The CellPipe 7130 RG cannot work in ADSL, VDSL and Ethernet WAN mode at the same time. Note: The ADSL, VDSL and Ethernet WAN lines share the same eight WAN Connect (or layer-2) interfaces that you configure in the CellPipe 7130 RG. Refer to Section 5.5 on page 105 for the WAN > Connect screen. 20 CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide Chapter 1 Introducing the CellPipe 7130 RG Computers can connect to the CellPipe 7130 RG’s LAN ports (or wirelessly). Figure 1 CellPipe 7130 RG’s Internet Access Application WLAN WAN Bridging IPoE PPPoE ADSL / VDSL LAN WLAN WAN IPoA / PPPoA LAN ADSL WLAN WAN Bridging IPoE PPPoE LAN Ethernet DSL You can also configure IP filtering on the CellPipe 7130 RG for secure Internet access. When the IP filter is on, all incoming traffic from the Internet to your network is blocked by default unless it is initiated from your network. This means that probes from the outside to your network are not allowed, but you can safely browse the Internet and download files. CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 21 Chapter 1 Introducing the CellPipe 7130 RG 1.4.2 HomePNA The CellPipe 7130 RG complies with HomePNA (Home Phoneline Networking Alliance, also known as HPNA) 3.1, a home networking technology for carrying data over existing coaxial cables and telephone wiring. The figure below shows your CellPipe 7130 RG (A) connecting to a phone line outlet for DSL Internet access and a coaxial outlet to relay Internet connectivity to other coxial outlets in the building. The laptop (B) connects wirelessly to the CellPipe 7130 RG. The set-up box (C) connects into a coaxial outlet in another part of the house for access to online videos. Figure 2 HomePNA Application 1.4.3 CellPipe 7130 RG’s USB Support The USB port of the CellPipe 7130 RG is used for file-sharing and media server features. 22 CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide Chapter 1 Introducing the CellPipe 7130 RG File Sharing Use the built-in USB 2.0 port to share files via a USB memory stick or a USB hard drive (B). You can connect one USB hard drive to the CellPipe 7130 RG at a time. Figure 3 USB File Sharing Application Media Server You can also use the CellPipe 7130 RG as a media server. This lets anyone on your network play video, music, and photos from a USB device (B) connected to the CellPipe 7130 RG’s USB port (without having to copy them to another computer). Figure 4 USB Media Server Application CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 23 Chapter 1 Introducing the CellPipe 7130 RG 1.5 Hardware Connections Remove the CellPipe 7130 RG’s plastic cover before using it. Figure 5 Hardware Connections 24 Do one of the following for your Internet connection: 1a DSL: Use a telephone wire to connect this port to a telephone jack (or the DSL or MODEM jack on a splitter, if you have one). 1b GigE: If you have a broadband router or modem already in your network, use an Ethernet cable to connect this port to an Ethernet jack with Internet access. ETHERNET: Use an Ethernet cable to connect a computer to one of these ports for initial configuration and/or Internet access. CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide Chapter 1 Introducing the CellPipe 7130 RG Note: Use an 8-wire Ethernet cable for Gigabit connections. Using a 4-wire Ethernet cable limits your connection to 100 Mbps. Note that the connection speed also depends on what the Ethernet device at the other end can support. HPNA: Use a coaxial cable to connect to a coaxial outlet and relay Internet traffic throughout your house through coaxial cabling. USB 2.0: Connect a USB (version 2.0 or lower) memory stick or a USB hard drive for file sharing. The CellPipe 7130 RG automatically detects the USB device. Use a USB extension cable if the stick is too big to fit. Use the power adaptor provided with your CellPipe 7130 RG to connect an appropriate power source to this socket. Push the power button to the on position. CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 25 Chapter 1 Introducing the CellPipe 7130 RG 1.6 LEDs (Lights) The following graphic displays the labels of the LEDs. Figure 6 LEDs on the Device None of the LEDs are on if the CellPipe 7130 RG is not receiving power. Table 1 LED Descriptions LED COLO STATUS DESCRIPTION INTERNET Green On The CellPipe 7130 RG has an IP connection but no traffic. Your device has a WAN IP address (either static or assigned by a DHCP server), PPP negotiation was successfully completed (if used) and the DSL connection is up. Blinking 26 The CellPipe 7130 RG is sending or receiving IP traffic. CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide Chapter 1 Introducing the CellPipe 7130 RG Table 1 LED Descriptions LED DSL WPS WLAN HPNA USB GigE ETHERNET 1-4 Power COLO Green Green Green Green Green Green Green Green Red STATUS DESCRIPTION Off There is no Internet connection or the gateway is in bridged mode. On The DSL line is up. Blinking The CellPipe 7130 RG is initializing the DSL line. Off The DSL line is down. On The wireless connection is successful. The light turns on for about 3 seconds before turning off. Blinking The CellPipe 7130 RG is connecting with other wireless clients using WPS. Off The WPS feature is not activated or has an error. On The wireless network is activated and is operating in IEEE 802.11b/g mode. Blinking The CellPipe 7130 RG is communicating with other wireless clients. Off The wireless network is not activated. On The CellPipe 7130 RG is connected to an HPNA-equipped device through the coaxial cable. Blinking Data is transmitting over the HPNA cable. Off No HPNA device is connected. On The CellPipe 7130 RG recognizes a USB connection. Blinking The CellPipe 7130 RG is sending/receiving data to /from the USB device connected to it. Off The CellPipe 7130 RG does not detect a USB connection. On The Giga Ethernet connection is working. Blinking The CellPipe 7130 RG is sending or receiving data to/ from the Giga Ethernet link. Off There is no Giga Ethernet link. On The CellPipe 7130 RG has a successful 100 Mbps Ethernet connection with a device on the Local Area Network (LAN). Blinking The CellPipe 7130 RG is sending or receiving data to/ from the LAN at 100 Mbps. Off The CellPipe 7130 RG does not have an Ethernet connection with the LAN. On The CellPipe 7130 RG is receiving power and ready for use. Blinking The CellPipe 7130 RG is self-testing. On The CellPipe 7130 RG detected an error while selftesting, or there is a device malfunction. Off The CellPipe 7130 RG is not receiving power. Blinking Firmware upgrade is in progress. Refer to the Quick Start Guide for information on hardware connections. CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 27 Chapter 1 Introducing the CellPipe 7130 RG 1.7 The RESET Button If you forget your password or cannot access the web configurator, you will need to use the RESET button at the back of the device to reload the factory-default configuration file. This means that you will lose all configurations that you had previously and the password will be reset to “telus”. Make sure the POWER LED is on (not blinking). To set the device back to the factory default settings, press the RESET button for ten seconds or until the POWER LED begins to blink and then release it. When the POWER LED begins to blink, the defaults have been restored and the device restarts. 1.8 The WLAN Button You can use the WLAN button of the device to turn the wireless LAN off or on. Make sure the POWER LED is on (not blinking). Press the WLAN button for one second and release it. The WLAN LED should change from on to off or vice versa. Refer to Section 7.4 on page 143 for more information. 1.9 The WPS Button You can use the WPS button to activate WPS in order to quickly set up a wireless network with strong security. Make sure the POWER LED is on (not blinking). Make sure the wireless LAN is turned on. Refer to Section 1.8 on page 28 and Section 7.4 on page 143 for information or check that the WLAN LED is on. Press the WPS button for more than one second and release it. Press the WPS button on another WPS -enabled device within range of the CellPipe 7130 RG. The WPS LED should flash while the CellPipe 7130 RG sets up a WPS connection with the wireless device. Refer to Section 7.6 on page 153 for more information. You must activate WPS in the CellPipe 7130 RG and in another wireless device within two minutes of each other. See Section 7.10.4 on page 163 for more information. 28 CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide CHAPTER Tutorials 2.1 Overview This chapter describes: • How to Set up a Wireless Network on page 29. • HomePNA Example Setup on page 39 • How to Use ATM QoS with Multiple PVCs on page 40. • How to Allow Out-of-band Remote Management from the WAN on page 53. • Using the Media Server Feature on page 65 • Using the File Sharing Feature on page 71. • Setting Up NAT Port Forwarding on page 72.. • Configuring Static Route for Routing to Another Network on page 74 • Configuring QoS Queue and Class Setup on page 77 • Access the CellPipe 7130 RG Using DDNS on page 80 Note: The tutorials featured in this chapter require a basic understanding of connecting to and using the Web Configurator on your CellPipe 7130 RG. For details, see the included Quick Start Guide. For field descriptions of individual screens, see the related technical reference in this User's Guide. 2.2 How to Set up a Wireless Network This tutorial gives you examples of how to set up an access point (AP) and wireless client for wireless communication using the following parameters. The wireless clients can access the Internet through an AP wirelessly. The CellPipe 7130 RG’s AP function is enabled by default. The wireless settings, such as the SSID and pre-shared key, are already configured in the CellPipe 7130 RG. Use this tutorial if you want to use wireless settings other than the default values. CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 29 Chapter 2 Tutorials 2.2.1 Example Parameters SSID SSID_Example3 Security WPA-PSK (Pre-Shared Key: ThisismyWPA-PSKpre-sharedkey) 802.11 mode IEEE 802.11b/g/n Mixed An access point or wireless router is referred to as “AP” and a computer with a wireless network card or USB/PCI adapter is referred to as “wireless client” here. We use the CellPipe 7130 RG web screens and M-302 utility screens as an example. The screens may vary slightly for different models. 2.2.2 Configuring the AP Follow the steps below to configure the wireless settings on your AP. Open the Network > Wireless LAN screen in the AP’s web configurator. Network > Wireless LAN 30 CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide Chapter 2 Tutorials Make sure the Active Wireless LAN check box is selected. Uncheck Auto Generate Key. This lets you enter an SSID and pre-shared key. Enter “SSID_Example3” as the SSID and select Auto to have the CellPipe 7130 RG automatically determine a channel which is not used by another AP. Set security mode to WPA-PSK and enter “ThisismyWPA-PSKpre-sharedkey” in the Pre-Shared Key field. Click Apply. Click the Advanced Setup tab and make sure 802.11b/g/n Mixed is selected in the 802.11 Mode field. Click Apply. Wireless LAN > Advanced Setup CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 31 Chapter 2 Tutorials Open the Status screen.Verify your wireless and wireless security settings under Device Information and check if the WLAN connection is up under Interface Status. Status Click the WLAN Station List hyperlink in the AP’s Status screen. You can see if any wireless client has connected to the AP. Figure 7 Status: WLAN Station List 2.2.3 Configuring the Wireless Client This section describes how to connect the wireless client to a network. 32 CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide Chapter 2 Tutorials 2.2.3.1 Connecting to a Wireless LAN The following sections show you how to join a wireless network using a wireless utility, as in the following diagram. The wireless client is labeled C and the access point is labeled AP. AP There are three ways to connect the client to an access point. • Configure nothing and leave the wireless client to automatically scan for and connect to any available network that has no wireless security configured. • Manually connect to a network. • Configure a profile to have the wireless client automatically connect to a specific network or peer computer. This example illustrates how to manually connect your wireless client to an access point (AP) which is configured for WPA-PSK security and connected to the Internet. Before you connect to the access point, you must know its Service Set IDentity (SSID) and WPA-PSK pre-shared key. In this example, the SSID is “SSID_Example3” and the pre-shared key is “ThisismyWPA-PSKpre-sharedkey”. After you install the wireless utility and then insert the wireless client, follow the steps below to connect to a network using the Site Survey screen. Open the wireless utility and click the Site Survey tab to open the screen shown next. Utility: Site Survey CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 33 Chapter 2 Tutorials The wireless client automatically searches for available wireless networks. Click Scan if you want to search again. If no entry displays in the Available Network List, that means there is no wireless network available within range. Make sure the AP or peer computer is turned on or move the wireless client closer to the AP or peer computer. When you try to connect to an AP with security configured, a window will pop up prompting you to specify the security settings. Enter the pre-shared key and leave the encryption type at the default setting. Use the Next button to move on to the next screen. You can use the Back button at any time to return to the previous screen, or the Exit button to return to the Site Survey screen. Utility: Security Settings The Confirm Save window appears. Check your settings and click Save to continue. Utility: Confirm Save 34 CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide Chapter 2 Tutorials The wireless utility returns to the Link Info screen while it connects to the wireless network using your settings. When the wireless link is established, the wireless utility icon in the system tray turns green and the Link Info screen displays details of the active connection. Check the network information in the Link Info screen to verify that you have successfully connected to the selected network. If the wireless client is not connected to a network, the fields in this screen remain blank. Utility: Link Info Open your Internet browser and enter the URL of any other web site in the address bar. If you are able to access the web site, your wireless connection is successfully configured. If you cannot access the web site, try changing the encryption type in the Security Settings screen, check the Troubleshooting section of this User's Guide or contact your network administrator. 2.2.3.2 Creating and Using a Profile A profile lets you automatically connect to the same wireless network every time you use the wireless client. You can also configure different profiles for different networks, for example if you connect a notebook computer to wireless networks at home and at work. This example illustrates how to set up a profile and connect the wireless client to an access point configured for WPA-PSK security. In this example, the SSID is “SSID_Example3”, the profile name is “PN_Example3” and the pre-shared key is “ThisismyWPA-PSKpre-sharedkey”. You have chosen the profile name “PN_Example3”. CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 35 Chapter 2 Tutorials Open the wireless utility and click the Profile tab to open the screen shown next. Click Add to configure a new profile. Utility: Profile The Add New Profile screen appears. The wireless client automatically searches for available wireless networks, which are displayed in the Scan Info box. Click on Scan if you want to search again. You can also configure your profile for a wireless network that is not in the list. Utility: Add New Profile 36 Give the profile a descriptive name (of up to 32 printable ASCII characters). Select Infrastructure and either manually enter or select the AP's SSID in the Scan Info table and click Select. CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide Chapter 2 Tutorials Choose the same encryption method as the AP to which you want to connect (In this example, WPA-PSK). Utility: Profile Security This screen varies depending on the encryption method you selected in the previous screen. Enter the pre-shared key and leave the encryption type at the default setting. Utility: Profile Encryption In the next screen, leave both boxes checked. Profile: Wireless Protocol Settings. CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 37 Chapter 2 Tutorials Verify the profile settings in the read-only screen. Click Save to save and go to the next screen. Profile: Confirm Save Click Activate Now to use the new profile immediately. Otherwise, click the Activate Later button. If you clicked Activate Later, you can select the profile from the list in the Profile screen and click Connect to activate it. Note: Only one profile can be activated and used at any given time. Profile: Activate When you activate the new profile, the wireless utility returns to the Link Info screen while it connects to the AP using your settings. When the wireless link is established, the wireless utility icon in the system tray turns green and the Link Info screen displays details of the active connection. 10 Open your Internet browser, enter the URL of any other web site in the address bar and press ENTER. If you are able to access the web site, your new profile is successfully configured. 11 If you cannot access the Internet go back to the Profile screen, select the profile you are using and click Edit. Check the details you entered previously. Also, refer to the Troubleshooting section of this User's Guide or contact your network administrator if necessary. 38 CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide Chapter 2 Tutorials 2.3 HomePNA Example Setup This tutorial shows you how you can use the CellPipe 7130 RG’s HomePNA feature to connect a television in another part of the house to the Internet through the coaxial port. You will need: • a Set-Top Box (STB) • HomePNA Ethernet Bridge • a television; and • an active Video On Demand (VOD)/Internet Protocol Television (IPTV) subscription The figure below shows the hardware setup for this tutorial: Connect your CellPipe 7130 RG to the Internet source. This could be either DSL or Ethernet. Connect the CellPipe 7130 RG’s coaxial port a coaxial outlet in your house. This relays Internet connectivity to other coaxial outlets in other parts of the house. In the room where your television is located, connect the HomePNA bridge to a coaxial outlet. CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 39 Chapter 2 Tutorials Using an Ethernet cable, connect the HomePNA bridge device to the STB. This grants Internet access to the STB. Refer to the user’s guide of your STB for information on how to connect it to your television, as well as configure your account settings on it. You should now be able to watch online videos in your television using your VOD or IPTV subscription. 2.4 How to Use ATM QoS with Multiple PVCs The CellPipe 7130 RG allows you to have more than one PVC using the ATM layer2 interface. You can apply different ATM QoS settings to traffic through different PVCs. In this example, real-time or video service, such as using a webcam to send photos or uploading media content to share videos and images on a blog, comes from IP address 192.168.1.33 and is forwarded out through PVC 1 (0/33). Nontime sensitive data transfers, such as e-mail or FTP, come from IP address 192.168.1.34 and are forwarded out through PVC 2 (0/34). The maximum upstream transmission speed of your ADSL port is 1 Mbps. You want to give the real-time traffic fixed bandwidth 400 Kbps and higher priority over the general data transmission which shares the bandwidth 600 Kbps. You allot more bandwidth to data transmission since there are more volume of this traffic than real-time traffic. Table 2 ATM QoS and Group Settings TRAFFIC TYPE LAN PVC ATM QOS BANDWIDTH GROUP Real-time or video service 192.168.1.33 atm0 (0/33) CBR 400 Kbps GR1/ PVC1 Non-time sensitive data 192.168.1.34 atm1 (0/34) Non Realtime VBR 600 Kbps GR2/ PVC2 Note: To apply different QoS priorities to different applications over a PVC, use the Advanced > QoS screens. The packet-level QoS feature is not applicable to a PVC with CBR or Realtime VBR enabled. Overview of what you have to do 40 Create PVCs using the Network > WAN screens. See Figure 2.4.1 on page 41. Create policy forwarding rules in the Advanced > Policy Forwarding screen to map specific IP addresses to the PVCs you created. See Figure 2.4.2 on page 51. CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide Chapter 2 Tutorials 2.4.1 Configuring PVCs Follows the steps below to set up two PVCs on the CellPipe 7130 RG. Table 3 Multiple PVC Settings PVC INTERFACE NAME WAN SERVICE 0/33 ppp0 PPPoE (pppoe_0_0_33) 0/34 atm1 IPoE (ipoe_0_0_34) Click Network > WAN > Connect. Select ATM from the Interface drop-down list and click Add. CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 41 Chapter 2 Tutorials 42 Enter the VPI and VCI values (0 and 33 in this example) for PVC 1. Select CBR in the Service Category field and set the Peak Cell Rate as 943 (divide the bandwidth 400000 bps by 424). Click Apply to save the changes and go back to the Connect screen. Click Add to configure another PVC. Enter the VPI and VCI values (0 and 34 in this example) for PVC 2. Select Non Realtime VBR in the Service Category field. Set the Peak Cell Rate as 1415 (divide the bandwidth 600000 bps by 424) and set both the Sustainable Cell Rate and Maximum Burst Size as 1414 (which is less than the peak cell rate). CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide Chapter 2 Tutorials Click Apply to save the changes and go back to the Connect screen. 2.4.1.1 Internet Connection Settings for PVC 1 Click Network > WAN > Servicesto configure WAN connection settings for PVC 1. Click Add. CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 43 Chapter 2 Tutorials 44 Select PVC 1 (atm0/0_0_33) as the layer-2 interface. Click Next. Select PPP over Ethernet and click Next. CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide Chapter 2 Tutorials Enter the user name (user@isp.net for example), password (qwert12345 for example) and service name (isp.net for example) for the PPP connection. Click Next. Remove the existing interfaces in the Selected Default Gateway Interfaces list. Select and move a WAN interface (ppp0 in this example) to the Selected Default Gateway Interfaces list to use that interface as the default gateway. Click Next. CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 45 Chapter 2 Tutorials 46 Select the first option. Remove the existing interfaces in the Selected DNS Server Interfaces list. Select and move a WAN interface (ppp0 in this example) to the Selected DNS Server Interfaces list to use that interface as the system DNS server. Click Next. CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide Chapter 2 Tutorials The summary screen displays. Click Apply/Save to save your changes and go back to the Services screen. 2.4.1.2 Internet Connection Settings for PVC 2 Click Add in the WAN > Services screen to configure WAN connection settings for PVC 2. Select PVC 2 (atm2/0_0_34) as the layer-2 interface. Click Next. CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 47 Chapter 2 Tutorials 48 Select IP over Ethernet and click Next. Select Obtain an IP address automatically and click Next. CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide Chapter 2 Tutorials Select Enable NAT and click Next. Remove the existing interfaces in the Selected Default Gateway Interfaces list. Select and move a WAN interface (atm1 in this example) to the Selected Default Gateway Interfaces list to use that interface as the default gateway. Click Next. CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 49 Chapter 2 Tutorials 50 Select the first option. Remove the existing interfaces in the Selected DNS Server Interfaces list. Select and move a WAN interface (atm1 in this example) to the Selected DNS Server Interfaces list to use that interface as the system DNS server. Click Next. The summary screen displays. Click Apply/Save to save your changes and go back to the Services screen. CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide Chapter 2 Tutorials The Services screen should look like the following. 2.4.2 Setting Policy Forwarding You can use policy forwarding to map traffic to a specific PVC, but you need to enter the source IP address, port number and/or MAC address of each packet that passes through the PVC. See Chapter 14 on page 213 for more information. Follow the steps below to map traffic from IP address 192.168.1.33 to PVC 1 and traffic from IP address 192.168.1.34 to PVC 2. Table 4 DSL Connection Groups GROUP LAN IP ADDRESS PORT MAC ADDRESS WAN INTERFACE GR1 192.168.1.33 80 (HTTP) AA:BB:AA:BB:AA:BB ppp0 (0/33) GR2 192.168.1.34 21 (FTP) FF:CC:FF:CC:FF:CC atm2 (0/34) 25 (E-mail) Click Advanced > Policy Forwarding to open the following screen. Click Add to create a new policy forwarding group GR1. CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 51 Chapter 2 Tutorials 52 Enter GR1 as the Policy Name. In this group, we will associate ppp0 (PVC 1) as the WAN interface with 192.168.1.33 as the IP address. Select pppoe_0_0_33/ ppp0 from the WAN Interface list. Enter 192.168.1.33 as the Source IP Address. Select the protocol and enter the source port, as well as the source MAC address. Click Apply to finish the settings and go back to the Policy Forwarding screen. GR1 has been added successfully to the interface group list. Click Add to create another interface group: GR2. Enter GR2 as the Policy Name. In this group, we will associate atm1 (PVC 2) as the WAN interface with 192.168.1.34 as the IP address. Select ipoe_0_0_34/ atm1 from the WAN Interface list. Enter 192.168.1.34 as the Source IP Address. Again, select the protocol and enter the source port, as well as the source MAC address. Click Apply to finish the settings and go back to the Policy Forwarding screen. CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide Chapter 2 Tutorials GR2 has been added successfully to the interface group list. Continue to add groups to associate other services with PVCs. The screen should look like the following. 2.5 How to Allow Out-of-band Remote Management from the WAN This tutorial shows you how to set up a dedicated WAN connection for ISP management of the CellPipe 7130 RG and prevent the clients on the LAN from configuring the CellPipe 7130 RG. You set up two DSL connections with different VLAN IDs and priorities to separate clients traffic from management traffic. The DSL connection for remote management has the highest priority. Table 5 Multiple VDSL Connection Settings WAN INTERFACE DESCRIPTION CONNECTION METHOD VLAN ID PRIORITY ppp0.200 Internet PPPoE 200 ptm0.300 RemoteMgmt IPoE 300 VID 200 ISP VID 200 VID 300 CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 53 Chapter 2 Tutorials 2.5.1 Configuring Multiple WAN Connections Follow the steps below to configure two VDSL connections. Make sure you set the WAN Link Mode to DSL in the Network > WAN > Mode screen. By default, there is a PTM layer-2 interface in VLAN MUX mode configured already on the CellPipe 7130 RG. DSL Connection for Internet Access 54 Go to the WAN > Services screen. Click Add. CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide Chapter 2 Tutorials Select ptm0/(0_0_1) as the layer-2 interface. Click Next. Select PPP over Ethernet, enter a descriptive service name (Internet in this example), and set the priority level to 2 and VLAN ID to 200. Click Next. CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 55 Chapter 2 Tutorials 56 Enter the user name (user@isp.net for example), password (qwert12345 for example) and service name (isp.net for example) for the PPP connection. Click Next. CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide Chapter 2 Tutorials Remove the existing interfaces in the Selected Default Gateway Interfaces list. Select and move a WAN interface (ppp1.200 in this example) to the Selected Default Gateway Interfaces list to use that interface as the default gateway. Click Next. Select the first option. Remove the existing interfaces in the Selected DNS Server Interfaces list. Select and move a WAN interface (ppp1.200 in this example) to the Selected DNS Server Interfaces list to use that interface as the system DNS server. Click Next. CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 57 Chapter 2 Tutorials The summary screen displays. The VLAN ID is appended to the service name you specified automatically. Click Apply/Save to save your changes and go back to the Internet Connection screen. DSL Connection for Remote Management 58 Go to the WAN > Services screen. Click Add. CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide Chapter 2 Tutorials Select ptm0/(0_0_1) as the layer-2 interface. Click Next. Select IP over Ethernet, enter a descriptive service name (RemoteMgmt in this example), and set the priority level to 7 and VLAN ID to 300. Click Next. CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 59 Chapter 2 Tutorials 60 Select Obtain an IP address automatically and click Next. Make sure Enable NAT is not selected and click Next. CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide Chapter 2 Tutorials Keep the WAN interface (ptm0.300 in this example) in the Available Routed WAN Interfaces list to not have the clients use this interface as the default gateway. Click Next. Select the first option. Keep the WAN interface (ptm0.300 in this example) in the Available WAN Interfaces list to not have the clients use this interface as the system DNS server. Click Next. CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 61 Chapter 2 Tutorials 62 The summary screen displays. Click Apply/Save to save your changes and go back to the Services screen. The VLAN ID is appended to the service name you specified automatically. The Internet Connection screen should look like the following. CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide Chapter 2 Tutorials DSL Connections Status Go to the Status screen. Check and write down the WAN IP addresses assigned by your ISP for the WAN connections in PTM mode you configured (1 and 2 in this example). Your DSL interface status should also be Up and display the transmission rates. Click the WAN Service Statistics link under More Status in the Status screen. CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 63 Chapter 2 Tutorials The WAN Service Ststistics screen displays. Check if any packets are transmitted or received through the two WAN connections you just configured. 2.5.2 Configuring Remote Management Follow the steps below to not allow access to the CellPipe 7130 RG from the LAN. 64 Click Advanced > Remote MGNT > Service Control. Select the Enable option, and deselect all service options in the LAN column. Click Apply. CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide Chapter 2 Tutorials 2.5.3 Testing the Connection After you finish all the settings in this tutorial, you would not be able to access the web configurator from the LAN anymore. Check if you can use the WAN IP address for the RemoteMgmt WAN connection to access the CellPipe 7130 RG. You should also be able to access the Internet using the computer which is connected to the CellPipe 7130 RG’s LAN port. 2.6 Using the Media Server Feature Use the media server feature to play files on a computer or on your television using a Digital Media Adapter (DMA). This section shows you how the media server feature works using the following media clients: • Microsoft (MS) Windows Media Player Media Server works with Windows Vista and Windows 7. Make sure your computer is able to play media files (music, videos and pictures). • A DMA You need to set up the DMA to work with your television (TV). Refer to your DMA’s Quick Start Guide for the correct hardware connections. Before you begin, connect the USB storage device containing the media files you want to play to the USB port of your CellPipe 7130 RG. 2.6.1 Configuring the CellPipe 7130 RG Note: The Media Server feature is enabled by default. To use your CellPipe 7130 RG as a media server, click USB Services > Media Server. Tutorial: USB Services > Media Server CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 65 Chapter 2 Tutorials Check Enable Media Server and click Apply. This enables DLNA-compliant media clients to play the video, music and image files in your USB storage device. 2.6.2 Using Windows Media Player This section shows you how to play the media files on the USB storage device connected to your CellPipe 7130 RG using Windows Media Player. Tutorial: Media Server Setup (Using Windows Media Player) USB Storage Device Computer with Windows Media Player Windows Vista Open Windows Media Player and click Library > Media Sharing as follows. Tutorial: Media Sharing using Windows Vista 66 CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide Chapter 2 Tutorials Check Find media that others are sharing in the following screen and click OK. Tutorial: Media Sharing using Windows Vista (2) In the Library screen, check the left panel. The Windows Media Player should detect the CellPipe 7130 RG. Tutorial: Media Sharing using Windows Vista (3) The CellPipe 7130 RG displays as a playlist. Clicking on the category icons in the right panel shows you the media files in the USB storage device attached to your CellPipe 7130 RG. CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 67 Chapter 2 Tutorials Windows 7 Open Windows Media Player. It should automatically detect the CellPipe 7130 RG. Tutorial: Media Sharing using Windows 7 (1) If you cannot see the CellPipe 7130 RG in the left panel as shown above, rightclick Other Libraries > Refresh Other Libraries. Select a category in the left panel and wait for Windows Media Player to connect to the CellPipe 7130 RG. Tutorial: Media Sharing using Windows 7 (2) 68 CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide Chapter 2 Tutorials In the right panel, you should see a list of files available in the USB storage device. Tutorial: Media Sharing using Windows 7 (2) 2.6.3 Using a Digital Media Adapter This section shows you how you can use the CellPipe 7130 RG with a DMA to play media files stored in the USB storge device in your TV screen. Note: For this tutorial, your DMA should already be set up with the TV according to the instructions in the DMA’s Quick Start Guide. Connect the DMA to an available LAN port in your CellPipe 7130 RG. Tutorial: Media Server Setup (Using DMA) USB Storage Device DMA-2500 CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 69 Chapter 2 Tutorials Turn on the TV and wait for the DMA’s Home (or similar) screen to appear. Using the remote control, go to MyMedia (or similar) to open the following screen. Select the CellPipe 7130 RG as your media server. Tutorial: Media Sharing using DMA-2500 The screen shows you the list of available media files in the USB storage device. Select the file you want to open and push the Play button in the remote control. Tutorial: Media Sharing using DMA-2500 (2) 70 CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide Chapter 2 Tutorials 2.7 Using the File Sharing Feature In this section you can: • Set up file sharing • Access the shared files from a computer 2.7.1 Set Up File Sharing To set up file sharing, you need to enable file sharing on your CellPipe 7130 RG. This shares the files in your USB device to other users in the local network. Go to USB Services > File Sharing > Share Configuration to enable file sharing and enter a workgroup name. Click Apply to save your settings. Tutorial: USB Services > File Sharing > Share Configuration This sets up the file sharing server. Tutorial: USB Services > File Sharing > Share Configuration (2) 2.7.2 Access Your Shared Files From a Computer You can use Windows Explorer to access the file storage devices connected to the CellPipe 7130 RG. Note: The examples in this User’s Guide show you how to use Microsoft’s Windows XP to browse your shared files. Refer to your operating system’s documentation for how to browse your file structure. Open Windows Explorer to access Bob’s Share using Windows Explorer browser. CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 71 Chapter 2 Tutorials In Windows Explorer’s Address bar type a double backslash “\\” followed by the IP address of the CellPipe 7130 RG (the default IP address of the CellPipe 7130 RG is 192.168.1.1) and press [ENTER]. A screen asking for password authentication appears. Type the user name and password and click OK. File Sharing via Windows Explorer Once you log in to the shared folder via your CellPipe 7130 RG, you do not have to re-log in unless you restart your computer. 2.8 Setting Up NAT Port Forwarding Thomas manages the Doom server on a computer behind the CellPipe 7130 RG. In order for players on the Internet (like A in the figure below) to communicate with the Doom server, Thomas needs to configure the port settings and IP address on the CellPipe 7130 RG. Traffic should be forwarded to the port 666 of the Doom server computer which has an IP address of 192.168.1.34. Additionally, players 72 CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide Chapter 2 Tutorials are only allowed to access the Doom server on Friday to Saturday, from 1PM to 8PM. Tutorial: NAT Port Forwarding Setup D=192.168.1.34 LAN WAN port 666 Thomas may set up the port settings by configuring the port settings for the Doom server computer (see Section 8.3 on page 172 for more information). Click Network > NAT to open the Port Forwarding screen. Enter the following values: Service Name Select User Defined. In the screen that opens, enter Doom_Server as the Service Name. WAN Interface Select the WAN interface through which the Doom service is forwarded. This is the default interface for this example, which is ipoe_eth4_1. Server IP Address Enter the IP address of the Doom server. This is 192.168.1.34 for this example. External Port/s Enter 666 as the Start and End port. Protocol Select TCP/UDP. This should be the protocol supported by the Doom server. Start/Stop Time Enter 13:00 ~ 20:00 in the time fields and select Friday ~ Saturday in the day field. Select Days CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 73 Chapter 2 Tutorials The screen should display as follows. Click Add. The port forwarding settings you configured should appear in the table. Click Apply to have the CellPipe 7130 RG start forwarding port 666 traffic to the computer with IP address 192.168.1.34. Players on the Internet then can have access to Thomas’ Doom server. 2.9 Configuring Static Route for Routing to Another Network In order to extend your Intranet and control traffic flowing directions, you may connect a router to the CellPipe 7130 RG’s LAN. The router may be used to separate two department networks. This tutorial shows how to configure a static routing rule for two network routings. In the following figure, router R is connected to the CellPipe 7130 RG’s LAN. R connects to two networks, N1 (192.168.1.x/24) and N2 (192.168.10.x/24). If you want to send traffic from computer A (in N1 network) to computer B (in N2 74 CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide Chapter 2 Tutorials network), the traffic is sent to the CellPipe 7130 RG’s WAN default gateway by default. In this case, B will never receive the traffic. N1 N2 You need to specify a static routing rule on the CellPipe 7130 RG to specify R as the router in charge of forwarding traffic to N2. In this case, the CellPipe 7130 RG routes traffic from A to R and then R routes the traffic to B.This tutorial uses the following example IP settings: N1 N2 Table 6 IP Settings in this Tutorial DEVICE / COMPUTER IP ADDRESS The CellPipe 7130 RG’s WAN 172.16.1.1 The CellPipe 7130 RG’s LAN 192.168.1.1 192.168.1.34 R’s N1 192.168.1.253 CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 75 Chapter 2 Tutorials Table 6 IP Settings in this Tutorial DEVICE / COMPUTER IP ADDRESS R’s N2 192.168.10.2 192.168.10.33 To configure a static route to route traffic from N1 to N2: Click Advanced > Static Route. Click Add. Configure the Static Route Setup screen using the following settings: • Select Active. • Type 192.168.10.0 and subnet mask 255.255.255.0 for the destination, N2. • Select the Internet connection interface for this route, ipoe_0_0_33/atm0 in this example. • Type 192.168.1.253 (R’s N1 address) in the Gateway IP Address field. Click Apply. The Advanced > Static Route screen should display the route you just added. Now B should be able to receive traffic from A. You may need to additionally configure B’s firewall settings to allow specific traffic to pass through. 76 CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide Chapter 2 Tutorials 2.10 Configuring QoS Queue and Class Setup This section contains tutorials on how you can configure the QoS screen. Let’s say you are a team leader of a small sales branch office. You want to prioritize e-mail traffic because your task includes sending urgent updates to clients at least twice every hour. You also upload data files (such as logs and email archives) to the FTP server throughout the day. Your colleagues use the Internet for research, as well as chat applications for communicating with other branch offices. In the following figure, your Internet connection has an upstream transmission bandwidth of 10,000 kbps. For this example, you want to configure QoS so that email traffic gets the highest priority with at least 5,000 kbps. You can do the following: • Configure a queue to assign the highest priority queue (7) to e-mail traffic from the LAN interface, so that e-mail traffic would not get delayed when there is network congestion. • Note the IP address (192.168.1.23 for example) and/or MAC address (AA:FF:AA:FF:AA:FF for example) of your computer and map it to queue 7. Note: QoS is applied to traffic flowing out of the CellPipe 7130 RG. Traffic that does not match this class is assigned a priority queue based on the internal QoS mapping table on the CellPipe 7130 RG. QoS Example DSL 10,000 kbps Your computer IP=192.168.1.23 and/or MAC=AA:FF:AA:FF:AA:FF Email traffic: Highest priority CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide A colleague’s computer Other traffic: Automatic classifier 77 Chapter 2 Tutorials Click Advanced > QoS > General and check Active. Set your WAN Managed Upstream Bandwidth to 10,000 kbps (or leave this blank to have the CellPipe 7130 RG automatically determine this figure). Tutorial: Advanced > QoS Go to Advanced > QoS > Queue Setup. Click Add to create a new queue. In the screen that opens, check Active and enter or select the following values: • Name: E-mail • Priority: 4 (High) • Weight: 8 • Rate Limit: 5,000 (kbps) Tutorial: Advanced > QoS > Queue Setup 78 CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide Chapter 2 Tutorials Go to Advanced > QoS > Class Setup. Click Add to create a new class. Check Active and follow the settings as shown in the screen below. Tutorial: Advanced > QoS > Class Setup Class Name Give a class name to this traffic, such as E-mail in this example. To Queue Link this to an item in the Advanced > QoS > Queue Setup screen, which is the E-mail queue created in this example. From Interface This is the interface from which the traffic will be coming from. Select LAN1. CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 79 Chapter 2 Tutorials Ether Type Select IP to identify the traffic source by its IP address or MAC address. MAC Address Type the MAC address of your computer AA:FF:AA:FF:AA:FF. Type the MAC Mask if you know it. IP Address Type the IP address of your computer 192.168.1.23. Type the IP Subnet Mask if you know it. This maps e-mail traffic coming from port 25 to the highest priority, which you have created in the previous screen (see the IP Protocol field). This also maps your computer’s IP address and MAC address to the E-mail queue (see the Source fields). Verify that the queue setup works by checking Advanced > QoS > Monitor. This shows the bandwidth alloted to e-mail traffic compared to other network traffic. Tutorial: Advanced > QoS > Monitor 2.11 Access the CellPipe 7130 RG Using DDNS If you connect your CellPipe 7130 RG to the Internet and it uses a dynamic WAN IP address, it is inconvenient for you to manage the device from the Internet. The CellPipe 7130 RG’s WAN IP address changes dynamically. Dynamic DNS (DDNS) allows you to access the CellPipe 7130 RG using a domain name. http://yourrouter.dyndns.org w.x.y.z 80 a.b.c.d CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide Chapter 2 Tutorials To use this feature, you have to apply for DDNS service at www.dyndns.org. This tutorial shows you how to: • Registering a DDNS Account on www.dyndns.org • Configuring DDNS on Your CellPipe 7130 RG • Testing the DDNS Setting Note: If you have a private WAN IP address, then you cannot use DDNS. 2.11.1 Registering a DDNS Account on www.dyndns.org Open a browser and type http://www.dyndns.org. Apply for a user account. This tutorial uses UserName1 and 12345 as the username and password. Log into www.dyndns.org using your account. Add a new DDNS host name. This tutorial uses the following settings as an example. • Hostname: yourrouter.dyndns.org • Service Type: Host with IP address • IP Address: Enter the WAN IP address that your CellPipe 7130 RG is currently using. You can find the IP address on the CellPipe 7130 RG’s Web Configurator Home page. Then you will need to configure the same account and host name on the CellPipe 7130 RG later. 2.11.2 Configuring DDNS on Your CellPipe 7130 RG Configure the following settings in the Advanced > Dynamic DNS screen. • Select Active Dynamic DNS. • Select Dynamic DNS for the DDNS type. • Type yourrouter.dyndns.org in the Host Name field. CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 81 Chapter 2 Tutorials • Enter the user name (UserName1) and password (12345). Click Apply. 2.11.3 Testing the DDNS Setting Now you should be able to access the CellPipe 7130 RG from the Internet. To test this: 82 Open a web browser on the computer (using the IP address a.b.c.d) that is connected to the Internet. Type http://yourrouter.dyndns.org and press [Enter]. The CellPipe 7130 RG’s login page should appear. You can then log into the CellPipe 7130 RG and manage it. CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide CHAPTER Introducing the Web Configurator 3.1 Overview The web configurator is an HTML-based management interface that allows easy device setup and management via Internet browser. Use Internet Explorer 6.0 and later versions. The recommended screen resolution is 1024 by 768 pixels. In order to use the web configurator you need to allow: • Web browser pop-up windows from your device. Web pop-up blocking is enabled by default in Windows XP SP (Service Pack) 2. • JavaScripts (enabled by default). • Java permissions (enabled by default). See Appendix C on page 351 if you need to make sure these functions are allowed in Internet Explorer. 3.2 User Levels There are three (3) user levels for logging into the CellPipe 7130 RG. The accounts have different access rights as follows : • Subscriber - the default user name is admin and the password is telus. You can change the user name and password for this account. You can also change all the Web Configurator screens using this account. • Privileged - the default user name is root and the password is telus. You can change the user name and password for this account. You cannot access the Advanced > Remote MGMT > Service Control screen but you can still use the SSH service. You can also modify the rest of the Web Configurator screens. • Installer - the default user name is tech and the password is telus. You cannot change the user name or password for this account. The Web Configurator is read-only so you also cannot modify any of the screens using this account. In addition, this account cannot view the following screens: CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 83 Chapter 3 Introducing the Web Configurator Advanced > Remote MGNT > Service Control Network > WLAN > WPS Station Maintenance > Tools > Firmware Maintenance > Tools > Configuration Maintenance > Tools > Restart This account has no access to files shared through the USB Services screens. Note: The CellPipe 7130 RG supports multiple remote management sessions running at one time. 3.2.1 Accessing the Web Configurator Make sure your CellPipe 7130 RG hardware is properly connected (refer to the Quick Start Guide). Launch your web browser. Type "http://192.168.1.1" as the URL. A password screen displays. Enter the default administrator user name admin and default administrator password telus. The password displays in non-readable characters. If you have changed the password, enter your password and click OK. Click Cancel to revert to the default password in the password field. Figure 8 Password Screen Note: Refer to Section 3.2 on page 83 for user level information. Each user level has its own account information for logging into the CellPipe 7130 RG. 84 CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide Chapter 3 Introducing the Web Configurator 3.3 Web Configurator Main Screen Figure 9 Home As illustrated above, the main screen is divided into these parts: • A - title bar • B - navigation panel • C - main window • D - status bar CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 85 Chapter 3 Introducing the Web Configurator 3.3.1 Navigation Panel Use the menu items on the navigation panel to open screens to configure CellPipe 7130 RG features. The following tables describe each menu item. Table 7 Navigation Panel Summary LINK TAB Home FUNCTION This screen shows the CellPipe 7130 RG’s general device and network status information. Use this screen to access the statistics and client list. Network Mode Use this screen to choose between DSL and Ethernet for your Internet connection. Connect Use this screen to add or remove a DSL PTM (Packet Transfer Mode) interface. Services Use this screen to configure ISP parameters, WAN IP address assignment, and other advanced properties. LAN IP Use this screen to configure LAN TCP/IP, DHCP and IP alias settings. Wireless LAN General Use this screen to configure the wireless LAN settings, WLAN authentication/security settings and MAC filtering rules. More AP Use this screen to configure multiple BSSs on the CellPipe 7130 RG. WPS Use this screen to enable WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup) and view the WPS status. WPS Station Use this screen to use WPS to set up your wireless network. WDS Use this screen to set up Wireless Distribution System links to other access points. Advanced Setup Use this screen to configure the advanced wireless LAN settings. Port Forwarding The NAT screens are available only when you enable NAT in a WAN connection. WAN NAT Use this screen to make your local servers visible to the outside world. DMZ Host Use this screen to configure a default server which receives packets from ports that are not specified in the Port Forwarding screen. ALG Use this screen to allow SIP sessions to pass through the CellPipe 7130 RG. File Sharing Share Configuration Use this screen to enable file sharing via the CellPipe 7130 RG. Media Server Media Server Configuration USB Services Remove Disk Safely 86 Use this screen to enable the media server on the CellPipe 7130 RG. Use this screen to safely disconnect the USB device from the CellPipe 7130 RG CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide Chapter 3 Introducing the Web Configurator Table 7 Navigation Panel Summary LINK TAB FUNCTION Incoming This screen shows a summary of the IP filtering rules, and allows you to add or remove an incoming IP filtering rule that allows incoming traffic from the WAN. DoS Use this screen to activate protection against Denial of Local Certificates Use this screen to view a summary list of certificates and manage certificates and certification requests. Trusted CA Use this screen to view and manage the list of the trusted CAs. Security Firewall Certificate Service (DoS) attacks. Advanced Static Route IP Static Route Use this screen to configure IP static routes to tell your device about networks beyond the directly connected remote nodes. Policy Forwarding Use this screen to configure policy routing on the CellPipe 7130 RG. RIP Use this screen to configure RIP (Routing Information Protocol) settings. QoS General Use this screen to enable QoS. Queue Setup Use this screen to configure QoS queues. Class Setup Use this screen to define a classifier. Policer Setup Use this screen to specify the committed rate and committed burst size for incoming packets. Monitor Use this screen to view QoS packets statistics. Dynamic DNS Remote MGMT This screen allows you to use a static hostname alias for a dynamic IP address. TR069 Use this screen to configure the CellPipe 7130 RG to be managed by an ACS (Auto Configuration Server). TR064 Use this screen to enable management via TR-064 on the LAN. ServiceControl Use this screen to configure which services/protocols can access which CellPipe 7130 RG interface. IPAddress Use this screen to configure from which IP address(es) users can manage the CellPipe 7130 RG. UPnP General Use this screen to turn UPnP on or off. Parental Control Time Restriction Use this screen to configure the days and times when the restrictions are enforced. Content Filter Use this screen to prevent users of your netowrk from viewing inappropriate web content. IGMP Use this screen to select the IGMP version to use as well as configure the settings for IGMP. IGMP Source Configuration Use this screen to set the server where the CellPipe 7130 RG gets the multicast group information IGMP Maintenance CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 87 Chapter 3 Introducing the Web Configurator Table 7 Navigation Panel Summary LINK System Logs Tools Diagnostic TAB FUNCTION General Use this screen to configure your device’s name, domain name, management inactivity timeout and password. Time Setting Use this screen to change your CellPipe 7130 RG’s time and date. View Log Use this screen to view the logs for the level that you selected. Log Settings Use this screen to change your CellPipe 7130 RG’s log settings. Firmware Use this screen to upload firmware to your device. Configuration Use this screen to backup and restore your device’s configuration (settings) or reset the factory default settings. Restart This screen allows you to reboot the CellPipe 7130 RG without turning the power off. General Use this screen to test the connections to other devices. 802.1ag Use this screen to configure CFM (Connectivity Fault Management) MD (maintenance domain) and MA (maintenance association), perform connectivity tests and view test reports. OAM Ping Test These screen displays information to help you identify problems with the DSL connection. 3.3.2 Main Window The main window displays information and configuration fields. It is discussed in the rest of this document. Right after you log in, the Status screen is displayed. See Chapter 4 on page 91 for more information about the Status screen. 3.3.3 Status Bar Check the status bar when you click Apply or OK to verify that the configuration has been updated. 88 CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide P ART II Technical Reference 89 90 CHAPTER Status Screens 4.1 Overview Use the Status screens to look at the current status of the device, system resources and interfaces (LAN, WAN and WLAN). The Status screen also provides detailed information from DHCP and statistics from traffic. 4.2 Status Screen Click Home to open this screen. Figure 10 Status Screen CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 91 Chapter 4 Status Screens Each field is described in the following table. Table 8 Status Screen LABEL DESCRIPTION Refresh Interval Enter how often you want the CellPipe 7130 RG to update this screen. Apply Click this to update this screen immediately. Device Information User Name This field displays the CellPipe 7130 RG system name. It is used for identification. Click this to go to the screen where you can change it. Model Number This is the model name of your device. MAC Address This is the MAC (Media Access Control) or Ethernet address unique to your CellPipe 7130 RG. Firmware Version This field displays the current version of the firmware inside the device. It also shows the date the firmware version was created. Click this to go to the screen where you can change it. DSL Firmware Version This field displays the current version of the device’s DSL modem code. WAN Information Information displays for each WAN interface you add to the CellPipe 7130 RG. Mode This is the method of encapsulation used by your ISP. IP Address This field displays the current IP address of the CellPipe 7130 RG in the WAN. IP Subnet Mask This field displays the current subnet mask in the WAN. LAN Information IP Address This field displays the current IP address of the CellPipe 7130 RG in the LAN. Click this to go to the screen where you can change it. IP Subnet Mask This field displays the current subnet mask in the LAN. DHCP This field displays what DHCP services the CellPipe 7130 RG is providing to the LAN. Choices are: Server - The CellPipe 7130 RG is a DHCP server in the LAN. It assigns IP addresses to other computers in the LAN. Relay - The CellPipe 7130 RG acts as a surrogate DHCP server and relays DHCP requests and responses between the remote server and the clients. None - The CellPipe 7130 RG is not providing any DHCP services to the LAN. Click this to go to the screen where you can change it. WLAN Information Channel 92 This is the channel number used by the CellPipe 7130 RG now. CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide Chapter 4 Status Screens Table 8 Status Screen LABEL DESCRIPTION WPS Status This field displays the status of WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup). Click this to go to the screen where you can change it. WDS Status This field displays • • • AP when WDS is disabled. Bridge when the CellPipe 7130 RG functions as a wireless network bridge only to use WDS (Wireless Distribution System) to establish wireless links with other APs. AP+Bridge when WDS is enabled and the CellPipe 7130 RG acts as a bridge and access point simultaneously. Click this to go to the screen where you can change it AP Information Information displays for each AP profile you activate on the CellPipe 7130 RG. ESSID This is the descriptive name used to identify the CellPipe 7130 RG in this wireless network. Click this to go to the screen where you can change it. Status This shows the current status of the wireless network. Security This shows the level of wireless security the CellPipe 7130 RG is using in this wireless network. System Status System Uptime This field displays how long the CellPipe 7130 RG has been running since it last started up. The CellPipe 7130 RG starts up when you plug it in, when you restart it (Maintenance > Tools > Restart), or when you reset it (see Section 1.7 on page 28). Current Date/Time This field displays the current date and time in the CellPipe 7130 RG. You can change this in Maintenance > System > Time Setting. System Mode This displays whether the CellPipe 7130 RG is functioning as a router or a bridge. CPU Usage This field displays what percentage of the CellPipe 7130 RG’s processing ability is currently used. When this percentage is close to 100%, the CellPipe 7130 RG is running at full load, and the throughput is not going to improve anymore. If you want some applications to have more throughput, you should turn off other applications (for example, using QoS; see Chapter 16 on page 219). Memory Usage This field displays what percentage of the CellPipe 7130 RG’s memory is currently used. Usually, this percentage should not increase much. If memory usage does get close to 100%, the CellPipe 7130 RG is probably becoming unstable, and you should restart the device. See Section 24.4 on page 280, or turn off the device (unplug the power) for a few seconds. Interface Status Interface This column displays each interface the CellPipe 7130 RG has. CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 93 Chapter 4 Status Screens Table 8 Status Screen LABEL DESCRIPTION Status This field indicates whether or not the CellPipe 7130 RG is using the interface. For the DSL interface, this field displays LinkDown (line is down) or Up (line is up or connected). For the LAN or Ethernet WAN interface, this field displays Up when the CellPipe 7130 RG is using the interface and NoLink when the line is disconnected. For the WLAN interface, it displays Up when WLAN is enabled or Disabled when WLAN is not active. Rate For the DSL interface, it displays the downstream and upstream transmission rate. For the LAN or Ethernet WAN interface, this displays the port speed and duplex setting. For the WLAN interface, it displays the maximum transmission rate. More Status WAN Service Statistics Click this link to view packet specific statistics of the WAN connection(s). See Section 4.2.1 on page 94. Route Info Click this link to view the internal routing table on the CellPipe 7130 RG. See Section 4.2.2 on page 96. WLAN Station List Click this link to display the MAC address(es) of the wireless stations that are currently associating with the CellPipe 7130 RG. See Section 4.2.3 on page 97. LAN Statistics Click this link to view packet specific statistics on the LAN and WLAN interfaces. See Section 4.2.4 on page 98. Client List Click this link to view current DHCP client information. See Section 4.2.5 on page 99. 4.2.1 WAN Service Statistics Click Status > WAN Service Statistics to access this screen. Use this screen to view the WAN statistics. Figure 11 Status > WAN Service Statistics 94 CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide Chapter 4 Status Screens The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 9 Status > WAN Service Statistics LABEL DESCRIPTION Interface This shows the name of the WAN interface used by this connection. A default name ipoa0, pppoa1, atmx (where x starts from 0 and is the index number of ATM layer-2 interfaces using different VPI and/or VCI values) or ptm0 indicates the DSL port. The pppx name (where x starts from 0 and is the index number of PPP connection on the CellPipe 7130 RG) indicates a PPP connection via any one of the WAN interface. eth4 indicates the Ethernet WAN interface (the physical Ethernet WAN port). The number after the dot (.) represents the VLAN ID number assigned to traffic sent through this connection. The number after the underscore (_) represents the index number of connections through the same interface. (null) means the entry is not valid. Description This shows the descriptive name of this connection. 0 and 35 or 0 and 1 are the default VPI and VCI numbers. The last number represents the index number of connections over the same PVC or the VLAN ID number assigned to traffic sent through this connection. (null) means the entry is not valid. Received Bytes This indicates the number of bytes received on this interface. Pkts This indicates the number of transmitted packets on this interface. Errs This indicates the number of frames with errors received on this interface. Drops This indicates the number of received packets dropped on this interface. Transmitted Bytes This indicates the number of bytes transmitted on this interface. Pkts This indicates the number of transmitted packets on this interface. Errs This indicates the number of frames with errors transmitted on this interface. Drops This indicates the number of outgoing packets dropped on this interface. Close Click this to close the window. Refresh Interval Enter the time interval for refreshing statistics in this field. Set Interval Click this button to apply the new poll interval you entered in the Refresh Interval field. Stop Click Stop to stop refreshing statistics. CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 95 Chapter 4 Status Screens 4.2.2 Route Info Routing is based on the destination address only and the CellPipe 7130 RG takes the shortest path to forward a packet. Click Status > Route Info to access this screen. Use this screen to view the internal routing table on the CellPipe 7130 RG. Figure 12 Status > Route Info The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 10 Status > Route Info LABEL DESCRIPTION Destination This indicates the destination IP address of this route. Gateway This indicates the IP address of the gateway that helps forward this route’s traffic. Subnet Mask This indicates the destination subnet mask of this route. Flag This indicates the route status. Up: The route is up. !(Reject): The route is blocked and will force a route lookup to fail. Gateway: The route uses a gateway to forward traffic. Host: The target of the route is a host. Reinstate: The route is reinstated for dynamic routing. Dynamic (redirect): The route is dynamically installed by a routing daemon or redirect Modified (redirect): The route is modified from a routing daemon or rederict. 96 Metric The metric represents the "cost of transmission". A router determines the best route for transmission by choosing a path with the lowest "cost". The smaller the number, the lower the "cost". Service This indicates the name of the service used to forward the route. CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide Chapter 4 Status Screens Table 10 Status > Route Info (continued) LABEL DESCRIPTION Interface This indicates the name of the interface through which the route is forwarded. • • • • • • • Close br0 indicates the LAN interface. ptm0 indicates the VDSL WAN interface using IPoE or in bridge mode. atmx (where x starts from 0 and is the index number of ATM layer-2 interfaces using different VPI and/or VCI values) indicates the ADSL WAN interface using IPoE or in bridge mode. pppoa1 indicates the ADSL WAN interface using PPPoA. ipoa0 indicates the ADSL WAN interface using IPoA. ppp0 indicates the WAN interface using PPPoE. eth4 indicates the Ethernet WAN interface using IPoE. Click this to close the window. 4.2.3 WLAN Station List Click Status > WLAN Station List to access this screen. Use this screen to view the wireless stations that are currently associated to the CellPipe 7130 RG. Figure 13 Status > WLAN Station List The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 11 Status > WLAN Station List LABEL DESCRIPTION MAC This field shows the MAC (Media Access Control) address of an associated wireless station. SSID This field shows the SSID to which the wireless station is connected. Interface This field shows the wireless interface to which the wireless station is connected. Close Click this to close the window. Refresh Interval Enter the time interval for refreshing statistics in this field. Set Interval Click this button to apply the new poll interval you entered in the Refresh Interval field. Stop Click Stop to stop refreshing statistics. CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 97 Chapter 4 Status Screens 4.2.4 LAN Statistics Click Status > LAN Statistics to access this screen. Use this screen to view the LAN statistics. Figure 14 Status > LAN Statistics The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 12 Status > LAN Statistics LABEL DESCRIPTION Interface This shows the LAN or WLAN interface. Received Bytes This indicates the number of bytes received on this interface. Pkts This indicates the number of transmitted packets on this interface. Errs This indicates the number of frames with errors received on this interface. Drops This indicates the number of received packets dropped on this interface. Transmitted 98 Bytes This indicates the number of bytes transmitted on this interface. Pkts This indicates the number of transmitted packets on this interface. Errs This indicates the number of frames with errors transmitted on this interface. Drops This indicates the number of outgoing packets dropped on this interface. Close Click this to close the window. Refresh Interval Enter the time interval for refreshing statistics in this field. Set Interval Click this button to apply the new poll interval you entered in the Refresh Interval field. Stop Click Stop to stop refreshing statistics. CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide Chapter 4 Status Screens 4.2.5 Client List DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol, RFC 2131 and RFC 2132) allows individual clients to obtain TCP/IP configuration at start-up from a server. You can configure the CellPipe 7130 RG as a DHCP server or disable it. When configured as a server, the CellPipe 7130 RG provides the TCP/IP configuration for the clients. If DHCP service is disabled, you must have another DHCP server on your LAN, or else the computer must be manually configured. Click Status > Client List to open the following screen. The read-only DHCP table shows current DHCP client information (including IP Address, Host Name and MAC Address) of all network clients using the CellPipe 7130 RG’s DHCP server. Figure 15 Status > Client List The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 13 Status > Client List LABEL DESCRIPTION Host Name This indicates the computer host name. MAC Address Every Ethernet device has a unique MAC (Media Access Control) address. The MAC address is assigned at the factory and consists of six pairs of hexadecimal characters, for example, 00:A0:C5:00:00:02. This indicates the MAC address of the client computer. IP Address CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide This indicates the IP address assigned to this client computer. 99 Chapter 4 Status Screens 100 CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide CHAPTER WAN Setup 5.1 Overview This chapter discusses the CellPipe 7130 RG’s WAN screens. Use these screens to configure your CellPipe 7130 RG for Internet access. A WAN (Wide Area Network) connection is an outside connection to another network or the Internet. It connects your private networks, such as a LAN (Local Area Network), and other networks, so that a computer in one location can communicate with computers in other locations. The figure below shows the WAN modes supported by the CellPipe 7130 RG (A): Ethernet Mode and DSL mode. Note that in Ethernet mode, B is the Internet Access Device (IAD). Figure 16 LAN and WAN ETHERNET MODE WAN LAN Internet DSL MODE WAN LAN Internet CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 101 Chapter 5 WAN Setup See Section 5.7 on page 123 for advanced technical information on WAN. 5.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter • The Mode screen lets you choose between DSL and Ethernet for your Internet connection (Section 5.4 on page 104). • The Connect screen lets you view, remove or add a layer-2 WAN interface (Section 5.5 on page 105). • The Services screen lets you view and configure the WAN settings on the CellPipe 7130 RG for Internet access (Section 5.6 on page 110). Table 14 WAN Setup Overview CONNECT SERVICES LINK INTERFACE DSL TYPE CONNECTION MODE WAN SERVICE TYPE ATM Default Mode PPPoE PPP user name and password, WAN IP address, DNS server and default gateway IPoE WAN IP address, NAT, DNS server and default gateway Bridging N/A EoA VLAN MUX Mode PTM PPPoA PPP user name and password, WAN IP address, DNS server and default gateway IPoA WAN IP address, NAT, DNS server and default gateway VLAN MUX Mode PPPoE PPP user name and password, WAN IP address, DNS server and default gateway IPoE WAN IP address, NAT, DNS server and default gateway Bridging N/A MSC Mode 102 CONNECTION SETTINGS CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide Chapter 5 WAN Setup Table 14 WAN Setup Overview CONNECT INTERFACE SERVICES DSL LINK TYPE Ethernet CONNECTION MODE WAN SERVICE TYPE Default Mode PPPoE PPP user name and password, WAN IP address, DNS server and default gateway IPoE WAN IP address, NAT, DNS server and default gateway PPPoE PPP user name and password, WAN IP address, DNS server and default gateway IPoE WAN IP address, NAT, DNS server and default gateway Bridging N/A MSC Mode VLAN MUX Mode CONNECTION SETTINGS 5.2 What You Need to Know Encapsulation Method Encapsulation is used to include data from an upper layer protocol into a lower layer protocol. To set up a WAN connection to the Internet, you need to use the same encapsulation method used by your ISP (Internet Service Provider). If your ISP offers a dial-up Internet connection using PPPoE (PPP over Ethernet) or PPPoA, they should also provide a username and password (and service name) for user authentication. WAN IP Address The WAN IP address is an IP address for the CellPipe 7130 RG, which makes it accessible from an outside network. It is used by the CellPipe 7130 RG to communicate with other devices in other networks. It can be static (fixed) or dynamically assigned by the ISP each time the CellPipe 7130 RG tries to access the Internet. If your ISP assigns you a static WAN IP address, they should also assign you the subnet mask and DNS server IP address(es) (and a gateway IP address if you use the Ethernet or ENET ENCAP encapsulation method). CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 103 Chapter 5 WAN Setup ATM Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM) is is a LAN and WAN networking technology that provides high-speed data transfer. ATM uses fixed-size packets of information called cells. With ATM, a high QoS (Quality of Service) can be guaranteed. ATM uses a connection-oriented model and establishes a virtual circuit (VC) between two endpoints before the actual data exchange begins. PTM Packet Transfer Mode (PTM) is packet-oriented and supported by the VDSL2 standard. In PTM, packets are encapsulated directly in the High-level Data Link Control (HDLC) frames. It is designed to provide a low-overhead, transparent way of transporting packets over DSL links, as an alternative to ATM. 5.3 Before You Begin You need to know your Internet access settings such as encapsulation and WAN IP address. Get this information from your ISP. 5.4 The Mode Screen The CellPipe 7130 RG can work in DSL or Ethernet mode depending on your Internet account subscription. Note that you can only enable one mode at a time. Figure 17 Network > WAN > Mode 104 CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide Chapter 5 WAN Setup The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 15 Network > WAN > Mode LABEL DESCRIPTION WAN Link Selection Select how you want to connect to the Internet: DSL: Select this if you have a DSL account and you want to connect to the Internet using the DSL port. Ethernet: Select this if you have a broadband modem or router to access the Internet. Connect the GigE port to your broadband modem or router. Apply Click this button to save your changes. 5.5 The Connect Screen The CellPipe 7130 RG must have a layer-2 interface to allow users to use the DSL port or Ethernet WAN port to access the Internet. The Connect screen lets you choose the layer-2 interface that the CellPipe 7130 RG uses. The layer-2 interface determines how data is transported, whether in frames (Ethernet) or cells (DSL), from the source (such as a computer on your LAN) to the destination. The screen varies depending on the interface type you select. CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 105 Chapter 5 WAN Setup Note: The ATM, PTM and Ethernet layer-2 interfaces cannot work at the same time. Figure 18 Network > WAN > Connect: PTM or Ethernet Figure 19 Network > WAN > Connect: ATM 106 CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide Chapter 5 WAN Setup The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 16 Network > WAN > Connect LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Check this to enable the current Connect (or layer-2) interface. Note that checking this automatically: • • Disables the other Connect interfaces Configures the WAN > Mode screen If you check Active in the WAN > Connect: DSL ATM Interface Configuration screen, the CellPipe 7130 RG uses DSL ATM to connect to the Internet. It also selects DSL in the WAN > Mode screen. If you check Active in the WAN > Connect: ETH WAN Interface Configuration screen. The CellPipe 7130 RG disables the previous DSL ATM connection and starts connecting to the Internet through Ethernet. It also selects Ethernet in the WAN > Mode screen. Interface Select an interface for which you want to configure here. PTM: The CellPipe 7130 RG uses the VDSL technology for data transmission over the DSL port. ATM: The CellPipe 7130 RG uses the ADSL technology for data transmission over the DSL port. Ethernet: The CellPipe 7130 RG transmits data over the Ethernet WAN port. Select this if you have a DSL router or modem in your network already. Interface This is the name of the interface. Vpi This is the Virtual Path Identifier (VPI). Vci This is the Virtual Channel Identifier (VCI). Category This is the ATM traffic class. Link Type This is the DSL link type of the ATM Connect interface. Connection Mode This displays the connection mode of the connect interface. QoS This displays whether QoS (Quality of Service) is enabled on the CellPipe 7130 RG. Remove Click the Remove button to delete this interface from the CellPipe 7130 RG. A window displays asking you to confirm that you want to delete the interface. Note: You cannot remove the Connect interface when a WAN service is associated with it. Add Click this button to create a new Connect interface. 5.5.1 Connect Configuration Click the Add button in the Connect screen to open the following. Use this screen to create a new Connect (or layer-2) interface. At the time of writing, you can configure only one PTM or Ethernet Connect interface on the CellPipe 7130 RG. CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 107 Chapter 5 WAN Setup You can configure and use multiple ATM Connect interfaces using different VPI and/or VCI values. The screen varies depending on the interface type you select. Figure 20 Network > WAN > Connect: Add/Edit DSL ATM Figure 21 Network > WAN > Connect: Add/Edit: DSL PTM/Ethernet WAN The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 17 Network > WAN > Connect: Add/Edit 108 LABEL DESCRIPTION ATM PVC Configuration VPI (Virtual Path Identifier) and VCI (Virtual Channel Identifier) define a virtual circuit. This section is available only when you configure an ATM Connect interface. VPI The valid range for the VPI is 0 to 255. Enter the VPI assigned to you. CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide Chapter 5 WAN Setup Table 17 Network > WAN > Connect: Add/Edit (continued) LABEL DESCRIPTION VCI The valid range for the VCI is 32 to 65535 (0 to 31 is reserved for local management of ATM traffic). Enter the VCI assigned to you. Select DSL Link Type Select EoA (Ethernet over ATM) to have an Ethenet header in the packet, so that you can have multiple services/connections over one PVC. You can set each connection to have its own MAC address or all connections share one MAC address but use different VLAN IDs for different services. EoA supports ENET ENCAP (IPoE), PPPoE and RFC1483/2684 bridging encapsulation methods. Select PPPoA (PPP over ATM) to allow just one PPPoA connection over a PVC. Select IPoA (IP over ATM) to allow just one RFC 1483 routing connection over a PVC. Encapsulation Mode Select the method of multiplexing used by your ISP from the dropdown list. Choices are: • • • • Service Category VC/MUX: In VC multiplexing, each protocol is carried on a single ATM virtual circuit (VC). To transport multiple protocols, the CellPipe 7130 RG needs separate VCs. There is a binding between a VC and the type of the network protocol carried on the VC. This reduces payload overhead since there is no need to carry protocol information in each Protocol Data Unit (PDU) payload. LLC/ENCAPSULATION: More than one protocol can be carried over the same VC. This is available only when you select PPPoA in the Select DSL Link Type field. LLC/SNAP-ROUTING: In LCC encapsulation, an IEEE 802.2 Logical Link Control (LLC) header is prefixed to each routed PDU to identify the PDUs. The LCC header can be followed by an IEEE 802.1a SubNetwork Attachment Point (SNAP) header. This is available only when you select IPoA in the Select DSL Link Type field. LLC/SNAP-BRIDGING: In LCC encapsulation, bridged PDUs are encapsulated by identifying the type of the bridged media in the SNAP header. This is available only when you select EoA in the Select DSL Link Type field. Select UBR Without PCR or UBR With PCR for applications that are non-time sensitive, such as e-mail. Select CBR (Continuous Bit Rate) to specify fixed (always-on) bandwidth for voice or data traffic. Select Realtime VBR (real-time Variable Bit Rate) for applications with bursty connections that require closely controlled delay and delay variation. Select Non Realtime VBR (non real-time Variable Bit Rate) for connections that do not require closely controlled delay and delay variation. Peak Cell Rate Divide the DSL line rate (bps) by 424 (the size of an ATM cell) to find the Peak Cell Rate (PCR). This is the maximum rate at which the sender can send cells. Type the PCR here. This field is not available when you select UBR Without PCR. CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 109 Chapter 5 WAN Setup Table 17 Network > WAN > Connect: Add/Edit (continued) LABEL Sustainable Cell Rate DESCRIPTION The Sustain Cell Rate (SCR) sets the average cell rate (long-term) that can be transmitted. Type the SCR, which must be less than the PCR. Note that system default is 0 cells/sec. This field is available only when you select Non Realtime VBR or Realtime VBR. Maximum Burst Size Maximum Burst Size (MBS) refers to the maximum number of cells that can be sent at the peak rate. Type the MBS, which is less than 65535. This field is available only when you select Non Realtime VBR or Realtime VBR. Select Connection Mode Select Default Mode to allow only one WAN service over a single virtual circuit. Select MSC Mode to allow multiple WAN services over a single virtual circuit. Each WAN connection has its own MAC address. Select VLAN MUX Mode to allow multiplexing of multiple protocols over a single virtual circuit. You need to assign a VLAN ID and priority level to traffic through each WAN connection. All WAN connections share one MAC address. This field is not available if you select PPPoA or IPoA as the DSL link type. The CellPipe 7130 RG uses Default Mode automatically for PPPoA or IPoA. Enable Quality Of Service Select this option to activate QoS (Quality of Service) on this interface to group and prioritize traffic. Traffic is grouped according to the VLAN group. The QoS setting applies to all WAN connections over the same PVC. This field is not available when you select CBR or Realtime VBR. Back Click this button to return to the previous screen without saving any changes. Apply/Save Click this button to save your changes and go back to the previous screen. 5.6 The Services Screen Use this screen to view and/or create WAN services over a layer-2 interface. Click Network > WAN > Internet Connection. The summary table shows you the configured WAN services (connections) on the CellPipe 7130 RG. To use NAT, firewall or IGMP proxy in the CellPipe 7130 RG, you need to configure a WAN connection with PPPoE or IPoE. 110 CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide Chapter 5 WAN Setup Note: When a Connect interface is in VLAN MUX Mode or MSC Mode, you can configure up to eight WAN services shared by both interfaces. Figure 22 Network > WAN > Services The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 18 Network > WAN > Services LABEL DESCRIPTION Interface This shows the name of the interface used by this connection. A default name atmx or ptm0_x (where x starts from 0 and is the index number of ATM layer-2 interface) indicates the DSL port. The ppp0_x name (where x starts from 1 and is the index number of PPP connection on the CellPipe 7130 RG) indicates a PPP connection via any one of the WAN interface. The eth4_x (where x starts from 1 and is the index number of ethernet connection on the CellPipe 7130 RG) indicates the Ethernet WAN interface (the physical Ethernet WAN port). The number after the underscore (_) represents either the index number of connections through the same interface or the VPI/VCI values assigned to the ATM layer-2 interface. The number after the dot (.) represents the VLAN ID number assigned to traffic sent through this connection. (null) means the entry is not valid. Description This is the service name of this connection. The first number represents the index number of connections over the same PVC or the VLAN ID number assigned to traffic sent through this connection. The next two numbers are the VPI and VCI numbers. 0 and 33 are the default VPI and VCI numbers. (null) means the entry is not valid. Type This shows the layer-2 interface type and method of encapsulation used by this connection. IPoW stands for IPoE used in an Ethernet WAN connection. CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 111 Chapter 5 WAN Setup Table 18 Network > WAN > Services LABEL DESCRIPTION Rate This shows the maximum data rate (in Kbps) allowed for traffic sent through this connection. This displays N/A when there is no limit on transmission rate. Vlan8021p This indicates the 802.1P priority level assigned to traffic sent through this connection. This displays N/A when there is no priority level assigned. VlanMuxId This indicates the VLAN ID number assigned to traffic sent through this connection. This displays N/A when there is no VLAN ID number assigned. ConnId This shows the index number of each connection. This displays N/A when the interface used by the connection is in Default Mode. IGMP This shows whether IGMP (Internet Group Multicast Protocol) is activated or not for this connection. IGMP is not available when the connection uses the bridging service. NAT This shows whether NAT is activated or not for this interface. NAT is not available when the connection uses the bridging service. Firewall This shows whether the firewall is activated or not for this connection. The firewall is not available when the connection uses the bridging service. Modify Click the Edit icon to configure the WAN connection. Click the Remove icon to delete the WAN connection. Add Click Add to create a new connection. 5.6.1 WAN Connection Configuration Click the Edit or Add button in the WAN Service screen to configure a WAN connection. 5.6.1.1 WAN Interface This screen displays when you add a new WAN connection. Figure 23 Network > WAN > Services: Add/Edit 112 CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide Chapter 5 WAN Setup The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 19 Network > WAN > Services: Add/Edit LABEL DESCRIPTION Select a layer 2 interface for this service Select ptm0 to use the DSL port as the WAN port and use the VDSL technology for data transmission. Select atmx (where x starts from 0 and is the index number of ATM layer-2 interfaces using different VPI and/or VCI values) to use the DSL port as the WAN port and use the ADSL technology for data transmission. Select eth4 if you want to use the Ethernet WAN port as the WAN port. Back Click this button to return to the previous screen. Next Click this button to continue. 5.6.1.2 Service Type If you set the DSL link type to PPPoA or IPoA for the ATM interface and configure a WAN connection using the ATM interface, you only need to configure the Enter Service Description field in this screen. Figure 24 Network > WAN > Services > Add/Edit: Service Type Figure 25 Network > WAN > Services > Add/Edit: Service Type - PPPoA or IPoA CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 113 Chapter 5 WAN Setup The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 20 Network > WAN > Services > Add/Edit LABEL DESCRIPTION Select WAN service type Select the method of encapsulation used by your ISP. Choices are PPP over Ethernet (PPPoE), IP over Ethernet and Bridging. Enter Service Description Specify a name for this connection or use the automatically generated one. Rate Limit Enter the maximum transmission rate in Kbps for traffic sent through the WAN connection. Otherwise, leave this field blank to disable the rate limit. This field is not available for an ATM connection. For the PTM connection, the Connection Mode in the Connect > Add: PTM screen should be MSC Mode with QoS enabled. Tag VLAN ID for egress packets Select this option to add the VLAN tag (specified below) to the outgoing traffic through this connection. Enter 802.1P Priority IEEE 802.1p defines up to 8 separate traffic types by inserting a tag into a MAC-layer frame that contains bits to define class of service. This field is available when the Connect interface is in VLAN MUX mode. Type the IEEE 802.1p priority level (from 0 to 7) to add to traffic through this connection. The greater the number, the higher the priority level. This field is available when the Connect interface is in VLAN MUX mode. Enter 802.1Q VLAN ID Type the VLAN ID number (from 1 to 4094) for traffic through this connection. This field is available when the PTM interface is in VLAN MUX mode. Back Click this button to return to the previous screen. Next Click this button to continue. 5.6.1.3 WAN IP Address and DNS Server The screen differs by the encapsulation you selected in the previous screen. See Section 5.7 on page 123 for more information. 114 CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide Chapter 5 WAN Setup PPPoE or PPPoA This screen displays when you select PPP over Ethernet (PPPoE) in the WAN Service Configuration screen or set the DSL link type to PPPoA for the ATM interface and configure a WAN connection using the ATM interface. Figure 26 Network > WAN > Services > Add/Edit Service Type 2: PPPoE or PPPoA The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 21 Network > WAN > Services > Add/Edit Service Type 2: PPPoE or PPPoA LABEL DESCRIPTION PPP User Name Enter the user name exactly as your ISP assigned. If assigned a name in the form user@domain where domain identifies a service name, then enter both components exactly as given. PPP Password Enter the password associated with the user name above. PPPoE Service Name Type the name of your PPPoE service here. CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide This field is not available for a PPPoA connection. 115 Chapter 5 WAN Setup Table 21 Network > WAN > Services > Add/Edit Service Type 2: PPPoE or PPPoA LABEL DESCRIPTION Authentication Method The CellPipe 7130 RG supports PAP (Password Authentication Protocol) and CHAP (Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol). CHAP is more secure than PAP; however, PAP is readily available on more platforms. Use the drop-down list box to select an authentication protocol for outgoing calls. Options are: AUTO - Your CellPipe 7130 RG accepts either CHAP or PAP when requested by this remote node. CHAP - Your CellPipe 7130 RG accepts CHAP only. PAP - Your CellPipe 7130 RG accepts PAP only. MSCHAP - Your CellPipe 7130 RG accepts MSCHAP only. MS-CHAP is the Microsoft version of the CHAP. Enable Fullcone NAT Select this option to enable full cone NAT on the CellPipe 7130 RG. Dial on Demand Select this check box when you do not want the connection up all the time and specify an idle time-out in the Inactivity Timeout field. Inactivity Timeout Specify an idle time-out when you select Dial on Demand. The default setting is 0, which means the Internet session will not timeout. Use Static IPv4 Address A static IPv4 address is a fixed IP that your ISP gives you. A dynamic IP address is not fixed; the ISP assigns you a different one each time you connect to the Internet. Select this if you do not have a dynamic IP address. IPv4 Address Enter the static IP address provided by your ISP. Enable PPP Debug Mode Select this option to display PPP debugging messages on the console. Bridge PPPoE Frames Between WAN and Local Ports Select this option to forward PPPoE packets from the WAN port to the LAN ports and from the LAN ports to the WAN port. In addition to the CellPipe 7130 RG's built-in PPPoE client, you can select this to allow up to ten hosts on the LAN to use PPPoE client software on their computers to connect to the ISP via the CellPipe 7130 RG. Each host can have a separate account and a public WAN IP address. This is an alternative to NAT for application where NAT is not appropriate. Clear this if you do not need to allow hosts on the LAN to use PPPoE client software on their computers to connect to the ISP. This field is not available for a PPPoA connection. Enable IGMP Multicast Proxy 116 Select this check box to have the CellPipe 7130 RG act as an IGMP proxy on this connection. This allows the CellPipe 7130 RG to get subscribing information and maintain a joined member list for each multicast group. It can reduce multicast traffic significantly. Back Click this button to return to the previous screen. Next Click this button to continue. CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide Chapter 5 WAN Setup IPoE This screen displays when you select IP over Ethernet in the WAN Service Configuration screen. Figure 27 Network > WAN > Services > Add/Edit Service Type 2: IPoE The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 22 Network > WAN > Services > Add/Edit Service Type 2: IPoE LABEL DESCRIPTION Obtain an IP address automatically A static IP address is a fixed IP that your ISP gives you. A dynamic IP address is not fixed; the ISP assigns you a different one each time you connect to the Internet. Select this if you have a dynamic IP address. Enable DHCP Option 60 Select this to identify the vendor and functionality of the CellPipe 7130 RG in DHCP requests that the CellPipe 7130 RG sends to a DHCP server when getting a WAN IP address. Vendor Class Identifier Enable DHCP Option 61 IAID CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide Enter the Vendor Class Identifier (Option 60), such as the type of the hardware or firmware. Select this to identify the CellPipe 7130 RG in DHCP requests that the CellPipe 7130 RG sends to a DHCP server when getting a WAN IP address. Enter the Identity Association Identifier (IAID) of the CellPipe 7130 RG. For example, the WAN connection index number. 117 Chapter 5 WAN Setup Table 22 Network > WAN > Services > Add/Edit Service Type 2: IPoE LABEL DUID Type DESCRIPTION Select Other to enter any string that identifies the CellPipe 7130 RG in the DUID field. Select DUID-LL (DUID Based on Link-layer Address) to enter the CellPipe 7130 RG’s hardware address, that is the MAC address in the DUID field. Select DUID-EN (DUID Assigned by Vendor Based on Enterprise Number) to enter the vendor’s registered private enterprise number. DUID Enter the DHCP Unique Identifier (DUID) of the CellPipe 7130 RG. Identifier Enter a unique identifier assigned by the vendor. This field is available when you select DUID-EN in the DUID Type field. Enable DHCP Option 125 Select this to add vendor specific information to DHCP requests that the CellPipe 7130 RG sends to a DHCP server when getting a WAN IP address. Manufacturer OUI Specify the vendor’s OUI (Organization Unique Identifier). It is usually the first three bytes of the MAC address. Product Class Enter the product class of the CellPipe 7130 RG. Model Name Enter the model name of the CellPipe 7130 RG. Serial Number Enter the serial number of the CellPipe 7130 RG. Use the following Static IP address Select this if you have a static IP address. WAN IP Address Enter the static IP address provided by your ISP. WAN Subnet Mask Enter the subnet mask provided by your ISP. WAN gateway IP Address Enter the gateway IP address provided by your ISP. Back Click this button to return to the previous screen. Next Click this button to continue. IPoA This screen displays only when you set the DSL link type to IPoA for the ATM interface and configure a WAN connection using the ATM interface. Figure 28 Network > WAN > Services > Add/Edit Service Type 2: IPoA 118 CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide Chapter 5 WAN Setup The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 23 Network > WAN > Services > Add/Edit Service Type 2: IPoA LABEL DESCRIPTION WAN IP Address Enter the static IP address provided by your ISP. WAN Subnet Mask Enter the subnet mask provided by your ISP. Back Click this button to return to the previous screen. Next Click this button to continue. 5.6.1.4 NAT, IGMP Multicast and Firewall Activation The screen is available only when you select IP over Ethernet in the WAN Service Configuration screen or set the DSL link type to IPoA for the ATM interface and configure a WAN connection using the ATM interface. Figure 29 Network > WAN > Services > Add/Edit - NAT and IGMP: IPoE/IPoA The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 24 Network > WAN > Services > Add/Edit - NAT and IGMP: IPoE/IPoA LABEL DESCRIPTION Enable NAT Select this check box to activate NAT on this connection. Enable Fullcone NAT Select this check box to activate full cone NAT on this connection. Enable Firewall Select this check box to activate Firewall on this connection. Enable IGMP Multicast Proxy Select this check box to have the CellPipe 7130 RG act as an IGMP proxy on this connection. This allows the CellPipe 7130 RG to get subscribing information and maintain a joined member list for each multicast group. It can reduce multicast traffic significantly. Back Click this button to return to the previous screen. Next Click this button to continue. CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide This field is available only when you select Enable NAT. 119 Chapter 5 WAN Setup 5.6.1.5 Default Gateway The screen is not available when you select Bridging in the WAN Service Configuration screen. Figure 30 Network > WAN > Services > Add/Edit - Default Gateway: PPPoE, PPPoA, IPoE or IPoA The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 25 Network > WAN > Services > Add/Edit - Default Gateway: PPPoE, PPPoA, IPoE or IPoA LABEL DESCRIPTION Selected Default Gateway Interfaces Select a WAN interface through which you want to forward the traffic. Available Routed WAN Interfaces Select a WAN interface in the Available Routed WAN Interfaces and use the left-facing arrow to move it to the Selected Default Gateway Interfaces to use that interface as the default gateway. To remove a WAN interface from the Selected Default Gateway Interfaces, use the righ-facing arrow. The interface on the top of the list gets the highest priority. Back Click this button to return to the previous screen. Next Click this button to continue. 5.6.1.6 DNS Server The screen is not available when you select Bridging in the WAN Service Configuration screen. 120 CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide Chapter 5 WAN Setup Note: If you configure only one PVC with IPoA or static IPoE connection using the ATM interface on the CellPipe 7130 RG, you must enter the static DNS server address. Figure 31 Network > WAN > Services > Add/Edit - DNS Server: PPPoE, PPPoA, IPoE or IPoA The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 26 Network > WAN > Services > Add/Edit - DNS Server: PPPoE, PPPoA, IPoE or IPoA LABEL DESCRIPTION Select DNS Server Interface from available WAN interfaces Select this to have the CellPipe 7130 RG get the DNS server addresses from the ISP automatically. Selected DNS Server Interfaces Select a WAN interface through which you want to obtain the DNS related information. Available WAN Interfaces Select a WAN interface in the Available WAN Interfaces and use the left-facing arrow to move it to the Selected DNS Server Interfaces to use that interface as the DNS server. To remove a WAN interface from the Selected DNS Server Interfaces, use the righ-facing arrow. The interface on the top of the list gets the highest priority. Use the following Static DNS IP address Primary DNS server CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide Select this to have the CellPipe 7130 RG use the DNS server addresses you configure manually. Enter the first DNS server address assigned by the ISP. 121 Chapter 5 WAN Setup Table 26 Network > WAN > Services > Add/Edit - DNS Server: PPPoE, PPPoA, IPoE or IPoA LABEL Secondary DNS server DESCRIPTION Enter the second DNS server address assigned by the ISP. Back Click this button to return to the previous screen. Next Click this button to continue. 5.6.1.7 Configuration Summary This read-only screen shows the current WAN connection settings. Figure 32 Network > WAN > Services > Add/Edit - Configuration Summary The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 27 Network > WAN > Services > Add/Edit - Configuration Summary LABEL DESCRIPTION Port / VPI / VCI This is the DSL port number, VPI and VCI for an ATM connection. This displays N/A for an Ethernet WAN conenction or not available for a PTM connection. Connection Type This is the encapsulation method used by this connection. Service Name This is the name of the service. Service Category This is the ATM traffic class. This field is blank for a PTM or Ethernet WAN conenction. 122 IP Address This shows whether the WAN IP address is assigned by the ISP, manually configured or not configurable. Service State This shows whether this service is active or not. CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide Chapter 5 WAN Setup Table 27 Network > WAN > Services > Add/Edit - Configuration Summary LABEL DESCRIPTION NAT This shows whether NAT is active or not for this connection. Full Cone NAT This shows whether full cone NAT is active or not for this connection. Firewall This shows whether Firewall is active or not for this connection. IGMP Multicast This shows whether IGMP multicasting is active or not for this connection. Quality Of Service This shows whether QoS is active or not for this connection. Back Click this button to return to the previous screen. Apply/Save Click this button to save your changes. 5.7 Technical Reference The following section contains additional technical information about the CellPipe 7130 RG features described in this chapter. Encapsulation Be sure to use the encapsulation method required by your ISP. The CellPipe 7130 RG can work in bridge mode or routing mode. When the CellPipe 7130 RG is in routing mode, it supports the following methods. IP over Ethernet IP over Ethernet (IPoE) is an alternative to PPPoE. IP packets are being delivered across an Ethernet network, without using PPP encapsulation. They are routed between the Ethernet interface and the WAN interface and then formatted so that they can be understood in a bridged environment. For instance, it encapsulates routed Ethernet frames into bridged Ethernet cells. PPP over Ethernet Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet (PPPoE) provides access control and billing functionality in a manner similar to dial-up services using PPP. PPPoE is an IETF standard (RFC 2516) specifying how a personal computer (PC) interacts with a broadband modem (DSL, cable, wireless, etc.) connection. For the service provider, PPPoE offers an access and authentication method that works with existing access control systems (for example RADIUS). CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 123 Chapter 5 WAN Setup One of the benefits of PPPoE is the ability to let you access one of multiple network services, a function known as dynamic service selection. This enables the service provider to easily create and offer new IP services for individuals. Operationally, PPPoE saves significant effort for both you and the ISP or carrier, as it requires no specific configuration of the broadband modem at the customer site. By implementing PPPoE directly on the CellPipe 7130 RG (rather than individual computers), the computers on the LAN do not need PPPoE software installed, since the CellPipe 7130 RG does that part of the task. Furthermore, with NAT, all of the LANs’ computers will have access. PPPoA PPPoA stands for Point to Point Protocol over ATM Adaptation Layer 5 (AAL5). A PPPoA connection functions like a dial-up Internet connection. The CellPipe 7130 RG encapsulates the PPP session based on RFC1483 and sends it through an ATM PVC (Permanent Virtual Circuit) to the Internet Service Provider’s (ISP) DSLAM (digital access multiplexer). Please refer to RFC 2364 for more information on PPPoA. Refer to RFC 1661 for more information on PPP. RFC 1483 RFC 1483 describes two methods for Multiprotocol Encapsulation over ATM Adaptation Layer 5 (AAL5). The first method allows multiplexing of multiple protocols over a single ATM virtual circuit (LLC-based multiplexing) and the second method assumes that each protocol is carried over a separate ATM virtual circuit (VC-based multiplexing). Please refer to RFC 1483 for more detailed information. Multiplexing There are two conventions to identify what protocols the virtual circuit (VC) is carrying. Be sure to use the multiplexing method required by your ISP. VC-based Multiplexing In this case, by prior mutual agreement, each protocol is assigned to a specific virtual circuit; for example, VC1 carries IP, etc. VC-based multiplexing may be dominant in environments where dynamic creation of large numbers of ATM VCs is fast and economical. LLC-based Multiplexing In this case one VC carries multiple protocols with protocol identifying information being contained in each packet header. Despite the extra bandwidth and processing overhead, this method may be advantageous if it is not practical to 124 CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide Chapter 5 WAN Setup have a separate VC for each carried protocol, for example, if charging heavily depends on the number of simultaneous VCs. Traffic Shaping Traffic Shaping is an agreement between the carrier and the subscriber to regulate the average rate and fluctuations of data transmission over an ATM network. This agreement helps eliminate congestion, which is important for transmission of real time data such as audio and video connections. Peak Cell Rate (PCR) is the maximum rate at which the sender can send cells. This parameter may be lower (but not higher) than the maximum line speed. 1 ATM cell is 53 bytes (424 bits), so a maximum speed of 832Kbps gives a maximum PCR of 1962 cells/sec. This rate is not guaranteed because it is dependent on the line speed. Sustained Cell Rate (SCR) is the mean cell rate of each bursty traffic source. It specifies the maximum average rate at which cells can be sent over the virtual connection. SCR may not be greater than the PCR. Maximum Burst Size (MBS) is the maximum number of cells that can be sent at the PCR. After MBS is reached, cell rates fall below SCR until cell rate averages to the SCR again. At this time, more cells (up to the MBS) can be sent at the PCR again. If the PCR, SCR or MBS is set to the default of "0", the system will assign a maximum value that correlates to your upstream line rate. The following figure illustrates the relationship between PCR, SCR and MBS. Figure 33 Example of Traffic Shaping ATM Traffic Classes These are the basic ATM traffic classes defined by the ATM Forum Traffic Management 4.0 Specification. CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 125 Chapter 5 WAN Setup Constant Bit Rate (CBR) Constant Bit Rate (CBR) provides fixed bandwidth that is always available even if no data is being sent. CBR traffic is generally time-sensitive (doesn't tolerate delay). CBR is used for connections that continuously require a specific amount of bandwidth. A PCR is specified and if traffic exceeds this rate, cells may be dropped. Examples of connections that need CBR would be high-resolution video and voice. Variable Bit Rate (VBR) The Variable Bit Rate (VBR) ATM traffic class is used with bursty connections. Connections that use the Variable Bit Rate (VBR) traffic class can be grouped into real time (VBR-RT) or non-real time (VBR-nRT) connections. The VBR-RT (real-time Variable Bit Rate) type is used with bursty connections that require closely controlled delay and delay variation. It also provides a fixed amount of bandwidth (a PCR is specified) but is only available when data is being sent. An example of an VBR-RT connection would be video conferencing. Video conferencing requires real-time data transfers and the bandwidth requirement varies in proportion to the video image's changing dynamics. The VBR-nRT (non real-time Variable Bit Rate) type is used with bursty connections that do not require closely controlled delay and delay variation. It is commonly used for "bursty" traffic typical on LANs. PCR and MBS define the burst levels, SCR defines the minimum level. An example of an VBR-nRT connection would be non-time sensitive data file transfers. Unspecified Bit Rate (UBR) The Unspecified Bit Rate (UBR) ATM traffic class is for bursty data transfers. However, UBR doesn't guarantee any bandwidth and only delivers traffic when the network has spare bandwidth. An example application is background file transfer. IP Address Assignment A static IP is a fixed IP that your ISP gives you. A dynamic IP is not fixed; the ISP assigns you a different one each time. The Single User Account feature can be enabled or disabled if you have either a dynamic or static IP. However the encapsulation method assigned influences your choices for IP address and default gateway. Full Cone NAT In full cone NAT, the NAT router maps all outgoing packets from an internal IP address and port to a single IP address and port on the external network. The NAT 126 CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide Chapter 5 WAN Setup router also maps packets coming to that external IP address and port to the internal IP address and port. In the following example, the CellPipe 7130 RG maps the source address of all packets sent from the internal IP address 1 and port A to IP address 2 and port B on the external network. The CellPipe 7130 RG also performs NAT on all incoming packets sent to IP address 2 and port B and forwards them to IP address 1, port A. Figure 34 Full Cone NAT Example 1, A 2, B Symmetric NAT The full, restricted and port restricted cone NAT types use the same mapping for an outgoing packet’s source address regardless of the destination IP address and port. In symmetric NAT, the mapping of an outgoing packet’s source address to a source address in another network is different for each different destination IP address and port. In the following example, the CellPipe 7130 RG maps the source address IP address 1 and port A to IP address 2 and port B on the external network for packets sent to IP address 3 and port C. The CellPipe 7130 RG uses a different mapping (IP address 2 and port M) for packets sent to IP address 4 and port D. A host on the external network (IP address 3 and port C for example) can only send packets to the internal host via the external IP address and port that the NAT router used in sending a packet to the external host’s IP address and port. So in CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 127 Chapter 5 WAN Setup the example, only 3, C is allowed to send packets to 2, B and only 4, D is allowed to send packets to 2, M. Figure 35 Symmetric NAT 3, C 2, B 4, D 1, A 2, M 4, E 5, B Introduction to VLANs A Virtual Local Area Network (VLAN) allows a physical network to be partitioned into multiple logical networks. Devices on a logical network belong to one group. A device can belong to more than one group. With VLAN, a device cannot directly talk to or hear from devices that are not in the same group(s); the traffic must first go through a router. In Multi-Tenant Unit (MTU) applications, VLAN is vital in providing isolation and security among the subscribers. When properly configured, VLAN prevents one subscriber from accessing the network resources of another on the same LAN, thus a user will not see the printers and hard disks of another user in the same building. VLAN also increases network performance by limiting broadcasts to a smaller and more manageable logical broadcast domain. In traditional switched environments, all broadcast packets go to each and every individual port. With VLAN, all broadcasts are confined to a specific broadcast domain. Introduction to IEEE 802.1Q Tagged VLAN A tagged VLAN uses an explicit tag (VLAN ID) in the MAC header to identify the VLAN membership of a frame across bridges - they are not confined to the switch on which they were created. The VLANs can be created statically by hand or dynamically through GVRP. The VLAN ID associates a frame with a specific VLAN and provides the information that switches need to process the frame across the network. A tagged frame is four bytes longer than an untagged frame and 128 CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide Chapter 5 WAN Setup contains two bytes of TPID (Tag Protocol Identifier), residing within the type/ length field of the Ethernet frame) and two bytes of TCI (Tag Control Information), starts after the source address field of the Ethernet frame). The CFI (Canonical Format Indicator) is a single-bit flag, always set to zero for Ethernet switches. If a frame received at an Ethernet port has a CFI set to 1, then that frame should not be forwarded as it is to an untagged port. The remaining twelve bits define the VLAN ID, giving a possible maximum number of 4,096 VLANs. Note that user priority and VLAN ID are independent of each other. A frame with VID (VLAN Identifier) of null (0) is called a priority frame, meaning that only the priority level is significant and the default VID of the ingress port is given as the VID of the frame. Of the 4096 possible VIDs, a VID of 0 is used to identify priority frames and value 4095 (FFF) is reserved, so the maximum possible VLAN configurations are 4,094. TPID User Priority 2 Bytes 3 Bits CFI VLAN ID 1 Bit 12 Bits Multicast IP packets are transmitted in either one of two ways - Unicast (1 sender - 1 recipient) or Broadcast (1 sender - everybody on the network). Multicast delivers IP packets to a group of hosts on the network - not everybody and not just 1. Internet Group Multicast Protocol (IGMP) is a network-layer protocol used to establish membership in a Multicast group - it is not used to carry user data. IGMP version 2 (RFC 2236) is an improvement over version 1 (RFC 1112) but IGMP version 1 is still in wide use. If you would like to read more detailed information about interoperability between IGMP version 2 and version 1, please see sections 4 and 5 of RFC 2236. The class D IP address is used to identify host groups and can be in the range 224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255. The address 224.0.0.0 is not assigned to any group and is used by IP multicast computers. The address 224.0.0.1 is used for query messages and is assigned to the permanent group of all IP hosts (including gateways). All hosts must join the 224.0.0.1 group in order to participate in IGMP. The address 224.0.0.2 is assigned to the multicast routers group. At start up, the CellPipe 7130 RG queries all directly connected networks to gather group membership. After that, the CellPipe 7130 RG periodically updates this information. DNS Server Address Assignment Use Domain Name System (DNS) to map a domain name to its corresponding IP address and vice versa. The DNS server is extremely important because without it, you must know the IP address of a computer before you can access it. CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 129 Chapter 5 WAN Setup The CellPipe 7130 RG can get the DNS server addresses in the following ways. 130 The ISP tells you the DNS server addresses, usually in the form of an information sheet, when you sign up. If your ISP gives you DNS server addresses, manually enter them in the DNS server fields. If your ISP dynamically assigns the DNS server IP addresses (along with the CellPipe 7130 RG’s WAN IP address), set the DNS server fields to get the DNS server address from the ISP. CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide CHAPTER LAN Setup 6.1 Overview A Local Area Network (LAN) is a shared communication system to which many computers are attached. A LAN is usually located in one immediate area such as a building or floor of a building. The LAN screens can help you configure a LAN DHCP server and manage IP addresses. LAN • See Section 6.4 on page 134 for more information on LANs. • See Appendix E on page 373 for more information on IP addresses and subnetting. 6.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter The LAN IP screen lets you set the LAN IP address and subnet mask of your CellPipe 7130 RG and configure other LAN TCP/IP settings (Section 6.3 on page 133). CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 131 Chapter 6 LAN Setup 6.2 What You Need To Know IP Address Similar to the way houses on a street share a common street name, so too do computers on a LAN share one common network number. This is known as an Internet Protocol address. Subnet Mask The subnet mask specifies the network number portion of an IP address. Your CellPipe 7130 RG will compute the subnet mask automatically based on the IP address that you entered. You don't need to change the subnet mask computed by the CellPipe 7130 RG unless you are instructed to do otherwise. DHCP DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) allows clients to obtain TCP/IP configuration at start-up from a server. This CellPipe 7130 RG has a built-in DHCP server capability that assigns IP addresses and DNS servers to systems that support DHCP client capability. RIP RIP (Routing Information Protocol) allows a router to exchange routing information with other routers. Multicast and IGMP Traditionally, IP packets are transmitted in one of either two ways - Unicast (1 sender - 1 recipient) or Broadcast (1 sender - everybody on the network). Multicast delivers IP packets to a group of hosts on the network - not everybody and not just 1. IGMP (Internet Group Multicast Protocol) is a network-layer protocol used to establish membership in a Multicast group - it is not used to carry user data. There are two versions 1 and 2. IGMP version 2 is an improvement over version 1 but IGMP version 1 is still in wide use. DNS DNS (Domain Name System) maps a domain name to its corresponding IP address and vice versa. The DNS server is extremely important because without it, you must know the IP address of a computer before you can access it. The DNS server addresses you enter when you set up DHCP are passed to the client machines along with the assigned IP address and subnet mask. 132 CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide Chapter 6 LAN Setup 6.3 The LAN IP Screen Click Network > LAN to open the IP screen. See Section 6.4 on page 134 for background information. Use this screen to set the Local Area Network IP address and subnet mask of your CellPipe 7130 RG. Figure 36 LAN > IP The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 28 LAN > IP LABEL DESCRIPTION LAN TCP/IP IP Address Enter the LAN IP address you want to assign to your CellPipe 7130 RG in dotted decimal notation, for example, 192.168.1.1 (factory default). IP Subnet Mask Type the subnet mask of your network in dotted decimal notation, for example 255.255.255.0 (factory default). DHCP Setup CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 133 Chapter 6 LAN Setup Table 28 LAN > IP LABEL DESCRIPTION Active DHCP Select this to have the CellPipe 7130 RG act as a DHCP server or DHCP relay agent. Otherwise, deselect this to not have the CellPipe 7130 RG provide any DHCP services. The DHCP server will be disabled. IP Pool Starting Address This field specifies the first of the contiguous addresses in the IP address pool. Pool Size This field specifies the size, or count of the IP address pool. DNS Servers Assigned by DHCP Server If you do not configure DNS servers, the CellPipe 7130 RG uses its LAN IP address and tells the DHCP clients on the LAN that itself is the DNS server. When a LAN client sends a DNS query to the CellPipe 7130 RG, the CellPipe 7130 RG forwards the query to its system DNS server you configured in the WAN screen. First DNS Server Enter the first DNS (Domain Name System) server IP address the CellPipe 7130 RG passes to the DHCP clients. Second DNS Server Enter the second DNS (Domain Name System) server IP address the CellPipe 7130 RG passes to the DHCP clients. IGMP Snooping Active IGMP Snooping Select this option to enable IGMP snooping. This allows the CellPipe 7130 RG to passively learn multicast group. Active IP Alias Select the check box to configure another LAN network for the CellPipe 7130 RG. IP Address Enter the IP address of your CellPipe 7130 RG in dotted decimal notation. IP Subnet Mask Type the subnet mask of your network in dotted decimal notation, for example 255.255.255.0 (factory default). Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the CellPipe 7130 RG. 6.4 Technical Reference The following section contains additional technical information about the CellPipe 7130 RG features described in this chapter. 134 CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide Chapter 6 LAN Setup LANs, WANs and the CellPipe 7130 RG The actual physical connection determines whether the CellPipe 7130 RG ports are LAN or WAN ports. There are two separate IP networks, one inside the LAN network and the other outside the WAN network as shown next. Figure 37 LAN and WAN IP Addresses LAN WAN DHCP Setup DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol, RFC 2131 and RFC 2132) allows individual clients to obtain TCP/IP configuration at start-up from a server. You can configure the CellPipe 7130 RG as a DHCP server or disable it. When configured as a server, the CellPipe 7130 RG provides the TCP/IP configuration for the clients. If you turn DHCP service off, you must have another DHCP server on your LAN, or else the computer must be manually configured. IP Pool Setup The CellPipe 7130 RG is pre-configured with a pool of IP addresses for the DHCP clients (DHCP Pool). See the product specifications in the appendices. Do not assign static IP addresses from the DHCP pool to your LAN computers. LAN TCP/IP The CellPipe 7130 RG has built-in DHCP server capability that assigns IP addresses and DNS servers to systems that support DHCP client capability. IP Address and Subnet Mask Similar to the way houses on a street share a common street name, so too do computers on a LAN share one common network number. Where you obtain your network number depends on your particular situation. If the ISP or your network administrator assigns you a block of registered IP CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 135 Chapter 6 LAN Setup addresses, follow their instructions in selecting the IP addresses and the subnet mask. If the ISP did not explicitly give you an IP network number, then most likely you have a single user account and the ISP will assign you a dynamic IP address when the connection is established. If this is the case, it is recommended that you select a network number from 192.168.0.0 to 192.168.255.0 and you must enable the Network Address Translation (NAT) feature of the CellPipe 7130 RG. The Internet Assigned Number Authority (IANA) reserved this block of addresses specifically for private use; please do not use any other number unless you are told otherwise. Let's say you select 192.168.1.0 as the network number; which covers 254 individual addresses, from 192.168.1.1 to 192.168.1.254 (zero and 255 are reserved). In other words, the first three numbers specify the network number while the last number identifies an individual computer on that network. Once you have decided on the network number, pick an IP address that is easy to remember, for instance, 192.168.1.1, for your CellPipe 7130 RG, but make sure that no other device on your network is using that IP address. The subnet mask specifies the network number portion of an IP address. Your CellPipe 7130 RG will compute the subnet mask automatically based on the IP address that you entered. You don't need to change the subnet mask computed by the CellPipe 7130 RG unless you are instructed to do otherwise. Private IP Addresses Every machine on the Internet must have a unique address. If your networks are isolated from the Internet, for example, only between your two branch offices, you can assign any IP addresses to the hosts without problems. However, the Internet Assigned Numbers Authority (IANA) has reserved the following three blocks of IP addresses specifically for private networks: • 10.0.0.0 • 172.16.0.0 — 10.255.255.255 — 172.31.255.255 • 192.168.0.0 — 192.168.255.255 You can obtain your IP address from the IANA, from an ISP or it can be assigned from a private network. If you belong to a small organization and your Internet access is through an ISP, the ISP can provide you with the Internet addresses for your local networks. On the other hand, if you are part of a much larger organization, you should consult your network administrator for the appropriate IP addresses. Note: Regardless of your particular situation, do not create an arbitrary IP address; always follow the guidelines above. For more information on address assignment, please refer to RFC 1597, “Address Allocation for Private Internets” and RFC 1466, “Guidelines for Management of IP Address Space”. 136 CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide Chapter 6 LAN Setup IP Alias IP alias allows you to partition a physical network into different logical networks over the same Ethernet interface. The CellPipe 7130 RG supports three logical LAN interfaces via its single physical Ethernet interface with the CellPipe 7130 RG itself as the gateway for each LAN network. When you use IP alias, you can also configure firewall rules to control access between the LAN's logical networks (subnets). Note: Make sure that the subnets of the logical networks do not overlap. The following figure shows a LAN divided into subnets A and B. Figure 38 Physical Network & Partitioned Logical Networks A: 192.168.1.1 - 192.168.1.24 Ethernet Interface B: 192.168.2.1 - 192.168.2.24 CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 137 Chapter 6 LAN Setup 138 CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide CHAPTER Wireless LAN 7.1 Overview This chapter describes how to perform tasks related to setting up and optimizing your wireless network, including the following. • Turning the wireless connection on or off. • Configuring a name, wireless channel and security for the network. • Using WiFi Protected Setup (WPS) to configure your wireless network. • Using a MAC (Media Access Control) address filter to restrict access to the wireless network. See Chapter 2 on page 29 for a tutorial showing how to set up your wireless connection in an example scenario. See Section 7.10 on page 159 for advanced technical information on wireless networks. 7.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter This chapter describes the CellPipe 7130 RG’s Network > Wireless LAN screens. Use these screens to set up your CellPipe 7130 RG’s wireless connection. • The General screen lets you turn the wireless connection on or off, set up wireless security and make other basic configuration changes (Section 7.4 on page 143). You can also configure the MAC filter to allow or block access to the CellPipe 7130 RG based on the MAC addresses of the wireless stations. • The More AP screen lets you set up multiple wireless networks on your CellPipe 7130 RG (Section 7.5 on page 152). • Use the WPS screen and the WPS Station screen to use WiFi Protected Setup (WPS). WPS lets you set up a secure network quickly, when connecting to other WPS-enabled devices. Use the WPS screen (see Section 7.6 on page 153) to enable or disable WPS, generate a security PIN (Personal Identification Number) and see information about the CellPipe 7130 RG’s WPS status. Use the WPS Station (see Section 7.7 on page 155) screen to set up WPS by pressing a button or using a PIN. CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 139 Chapter 7 Wireless LAN • The WDS screen lets you set up a Wireless Distribution System, in which the CellPipe 7130 RG acts as a bridge with other access points (Section 7.8 on page 156). • The Advanced Setup screen lets you change the wireless mode, and make other advanced wireless configuration changes (Section 7.9 on page 158). You don’t necessarily need to use all these screens to set up your wireless connection. For example, you may just want to set up a network name, a wireless radio channel and some security in the General screen. 7.2 What You Need to Know Wireless Basics “Wireless” is essentially radio communication. In the same way that walkie-talkie radios send and receive information over the airwaves, wireless networking devices exchange information with one another. A wireless networking device is just like a radio that lets your computer exchange information with radios attached to other computers. Like walkie-talkies, most wireless networking devices operate at radio frequency bands that are open to the public and do not require a license to use. However, wireless networking is different from that of most traditional radio communications in that there a number of wireless networking standards available with different methods of data encryption. Wireless Network Construction Wireless networks consist of wireless clients, access points and bridges. • A wireless client is a radio connected to a user’s computer. • An access point is a radio with a wired connection to a network, which can connect with numerous wireless clients and let them access the network. • A bridge is a radio that relays communications between access points and wireless clients, extending a network’s range. Traditionally, a wireless network operates in one of two ways. • An “infrastructure” type of network has one or more access points and one or more wireless clients. The wireless clients connect to the access points. • An “ad-hoc” type of network is one in which there is no access point. Wireless clients connect to one another in order to exchange information. Network Names Each network must have a name, referred to as the SSID - “Service Set IDentifier”. The “service set” is the network, so the “service set identifier” is the 140 CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide Chapter 7 Wireless LAN network’s name. This helps you identify your wireless network when wireless networks’ coverage areas overlap and you have a variety of networks to choose from. Radio Channels In the radio spectrum, there are certain frequency bands allocated for unlicensed, civilian use. For the purposes of wireless networking, these bands are divided into numerous channels. This allows a variety of networks to exist in the same place without interfering with one another. When you create a network, you must select a channel to use. Since the available unlicensed spectrum varies from one country to another, the number of available channels also varies. Wireless Security By their nature, radio communications are simple to intercept. For wireless data networks, this means that anyone within range of a wireless network without security can not only read the data passing over the airwaves, but also join the network. Once an unauthorized person has access to the network she/he can either steal information or introduce malware (malicious software) intended to compromise the network. For these reasons, a variety of security systems have been developed to ensure that only authorized people can use a wireless data network, or understand the data carried on it. These security standards do two things. First, they authenticate. This means that only people presenting the right credentials (often a username and password, or a “key” phrase) can access the network. Second, they encrypt. This means that the information sent over the air is encoded. Only people with the code key can understand the information, and only people who have been authenticated are given the code key. These security standards vary in effectiveness. Some can be broken, such as the old Wired Equivalent Protocol (WEP). Using WEP is better than using no security at all, but it will not keep a determined attacker out. Other security standards are secure in themselves but can be broken if a user does not use them properly. For example, the WPA-PSK security standard is perfectly secure if you use a long key which is difficult for an attacker’s software to guess - for example, a twenty-letter long string of apparently random numbers and letters - but it is not very secure if you use a short key which is very easy to guess. Because of the damage that can be done by a malicious attacker, it’s not just people who have sensitive information on their network who should use security. Everybody who uses any wireless network should ensure that effective security is in place. CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 141 Chapter 7 Wireless LAN A good way to come up with effective security keys, passwords and so on is to use obscure information that you personally will easily remember, and to enter it in a way that appears random and does not include real words. For example, if your mother owns a 1970 Dodge Challenger and her favorite movie is Vanishing Point (which you know was made in 1971) you could use “70dodchal71vanpoi” as your security key. Signal Problems Because wireless networks are radio networks, their signals are subject to limitations of distance, interference and absorption. Problems with distance occur when the two radios are too far apart. Problems with interference occur when other radio waves interrupt the data signal. Interference may come from other radio transmissions, such as military or air traffic control communications, or from machines that are coincidental emitters such as electric motors or microwaves. Problems with absorption occur when physical objects (such as thick walls) are between the two radios, muffling the signal. 7.3 Before You Begin Before you start using these screens, ask yourself the following questions. See Section 7.2 on page 140 if some of the terms used here do not make sense to you. • What wireless standards do the other wireless devices support (IEEE 802.11g, for example)? What is the most appropriate standard to use? • What security options do the other wireless devices support (WPA-PSK, for example)? What is the best one to use? • Do the other wireless devices support WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup)? If so, you can set up a well-secured network very easily. Even if some of your devices support WPS and some do not, you can use WPS to set up your network and then add the non-WPS devices manually, although this is somewhat more complicated to do. • What advanced options do you want to configure, if any? If you want to configure advanced options, ensure that you know precisely what you want to do. If you do not want to configure advanced options, leave them alone. 142 CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide Chapter 7 Wireless LAN 7.4 The General Screen Note: If you are configuring the CellPipe 7130 RG from a computer connected to the wireless LAN and you change the CellPipe 7130 RG’s SSID or security settings, you will lose your wireless connection when you press Apply to confirm. You must then change the wireless settings of your computer to match the CellPipe 7130 RG’s new settings. Click Network > Wireless LAN to open the General screen. Figure 39 Network > Wireless LAN > General The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 29 Network > Wireless LAN > General LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Wireless LAN Click the check box to activate wireless LAN. Channel Selection Set the operating frequency/channel depending on your particular region. Select a channel or use Auto to have the CellPipe 7130 RG automatically determine a channel to use. If you are having problems with wireless interference, changing the channel may help. Try to use a channel that is as many channels away from any channels used by neighboring APs as possible. The channel number which the CellPipe 7130 RG is currently using then displays next to this field. CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 143 Chapter 7 Wireless LAN Table 29 Network > Wireless LAN > General LABEL DESCRIPTION Bandwidth Select whether the CellPipe 7130 RG uses a wireless channel width of 20MHz or 40MHz. A standard 20MHz channel offers transfer speeds of up to 150Mbps whereas a 40MHz channel uses two standard channels and offers speeds of up to 300 Mbps. 40MHz (channel bonding or dual channel) bonds two adjacent radio channels to increase throughput. The wireless clients must also support 40 MHz. It is often better to use the 20 MHz setting in a location where the environment hinders the wireless signal. Select 20MHz if you want to lessen radio interference with other wireless devices in your neighborhood or the wireless clients do not support channel bonding. This field is available only when you set the 802.11 Mode to 802.11n Only or 802.11b/g/n Mixed in the Advanced Setup screen. Control Sideband This is available for some regions when you select a specific channel and set the Bandwidth field to 40MHz. Set whether the control channel (set in the Channel field) should be in the Lower or Upper range of channel bands. This field is available only when you set the 802.11 Mode to 802.11n Only or 802.11b/g/n Mixed in the Advanced Setup screen. Network Name (SSID) The SSID (Service Set IDentity) identifies the service set with which a wireless device is associated. Wireless devices associating to the access point (AP) must have the same SSID. Enter a descriptive name (up to 32 printable 7-bit ASCII characters) for the wireless LAN. Note: If you are configuring the CellPipe 7130 RG from a computer connected to the wireless LAN and you change the CellPipe 7130 RG’s SSID or wireless security settings, you will lose your wireless connection when you press Apply to confirm. You must then change the wireless settings of your computer to match the CellPipe 7130 RG’s new settings. 144 Hide Network Name (SSID) Select this check box to hide the SSID in the outgoing beacon frame so a station cannot obtain the SSID through scanning using a site survey tool. Enable Wireless Multicast Forwarding (WMF) Select this check box to allow the CellPipe 7130 RG to convert wireless multicast traffic into wireless unicast traffic. BSSID This shows the MAC address of the wireless interface on the CellPipe 7130 RG when wireless LAN is enabled. Security Mode See the following sections for more details about this field. MAC Filter Click this button to go to the MAC Filter screen to configure whether the wireless devices with the MAC addresses listed are allowed or denied to access the CellPipe 7130 RG using this SSID. CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide Chapter 7 Wireless LAN Table 29 Network > Wireless LAN > General LABEL DESCRIPTION Apply Click this to save your changes back to the CellPipe 7130 RG. Reset Click this to reload the previous configuration for this screen. 7.4.1 No Security Select No Security to allow wireless devices to communicate with the access points without any data encryption or authentication. Note: If you do not enable any wireless security on your CellPipe 7130 RG, your network is accessible to any wireless networking device that is within range. Figure 40 Wireless LAN > General: No Security The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 30 Wireless LAN > General: No Security LABEL DESCRIPTION Security Mode Choose No Security from the drop-down list box. CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 145 Chapter 7 Wireless LAN 7.4.2 WEP Encryption In order to configure and enable WEP encryption; click Network > Wireless LAN to display the General screen. Select WEP from the Security Mode list. Figure 41 Wireless LAN > General: Static WEP Encryption The following table describes the wireless LAN security labels in this screen. Table 31 Network > Wireless LAN > General: Static WEP Encryption 146 LABEL DESCRIPTION Security Mode Choose WEP from the drop-down list box. CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide Chapter 7 Wireless LAN Table 31 Network > Wireless LAN > General: Static WEP Encryption LABEL DESCRIPTION WEP Encryption WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy) provides data encryption to prevent unauthorized wireless stations from accessing data transmitted over the wireless network. Select 64-bit or 128-bit to enable data encryption. Key 1 to Key The WEP key is used to secure your data from eavesdropping by unauthorized wireless users. Both the CellPipe 7130 RG and the wireless stations must use the same WEP key for data transmission. Only one key can be activated at any one time. Select a default key to use for data encryption. If you chose 64-bit in the WEP Encryption field, then enter any 5 characters (ASCII string) or 10 hexadecimal characters ("0-9", "A-F") preceded by 0x for each key. If you chose 128-bit in the WEP Encryption field, then enter 13 characters (ASCII string) or 26 hexadecimal characters ("0-9", "A-F") preceded by 0x for each key. 7.4.3 WPA(2)-PSK In order to configure and enable WPA(2)-PSK authentication; click Network > Wireless LAN to display the General screen. Select WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK from the Security Mode list. Figure 42 Wireless LAN > General: WPA(2)-PSK CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 147 Chapter 7 Wireless LAN The following table describes the wireless LAN security labels in this screen. Table 32 Wireless LAN > General: WPA(2)-PSK LABEL DESCRIPTION Auto Generate Key This field is only available for WPA-PSK. Security Mode Choose WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK from the drop-down list box. Active Compatible This field is only available for WPA2-PSK. Select this if you want the CellPipe 7130 RG to support WPA-PSK and WPA2-PSK simultaneously. Encryption Select the encryption type (TKIP, AES or TKIP+AES) for data encryption. Select this option to have the CellPipe 7130 RG automatically generate an SSID and pre-shared key. The SSID and Pre-Shared Key fields will not be configurable when you select this option. Select TKIP if your wireless clients can all use TKIP. Select AES if your wireless clients can all use AES. Select TKIP+AES to allow the wireless clients to use either TKIP or AES. Pre-Shared Key The encryption mechanisms used for WPA(2) and WPA(2)-PSK are the same. The only difference between the two is that WPA(2)-PSK uses a simple common password, instead of user-specific credentials. Type a pre-shared key from 8 to 63 case-sensitive ASCII characters (including spaces and symbols). Group Key Update Timer The Group Key Update Timer is the rate at which the AP sends a new group key out to all clients. 7.4.4 WPA(2) Authentication Use this screen to configure and enable WPA or WPA2 authentication; click the Wireless LAN link under Network to display the General screen. Select WPA or WPA2 from the Security Mode list. Note: WPA or WPA2 is not available if you enable WPS before you configure WPA or WPA2 in the Wireless LAN > General screen. 148 CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide Chapter 7 Wireless LAN Note: If you select WPA or WPA2 in the Wireless LAN > General screen, the WDS and WPS features are not available on the CellPipe 7130 RG. Figure 43 Wireless LAN > General: WPA(2) The following table describes the wireless LAN security labels in this screen. Table 33 Wireless LAN > General: WPA(2) LABEL DESCRIPTION Security Mode Choose WPA or WPA2 from the drop-down list box. Active Compatible This field is only available for WPA2. Select this if you want the CellPipe 7130 RG to support WPA and WPA2 simultaneously. Encryption Select the encryption type (TKIP, AES or TKIP+AES) for data encryption. Select TKIP if your wireless clients can all use TKIP. Select AES if your wireless clients can all use AES. Select TKIP+AES to allow the wireless clients to use either TKIP or AES. CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 149 Chapter 7 Wireless LAN Table 33 Wireless LAN > General: WPA(2) LABEL DESCRIPTION WPA2 Preauthenticatio This field is available only when you select WPA2. Network Re-auth Interval This field is available only when you select WPA2. Pre-authentication enables fast roaming by allowing the wireless client (already connecting to an AP) to perform IEEE 802.1x authentication with another AP before connecting to it. Select Enabled to turn on preauthentication in WAP2. Otherwise, select Disabled. Specify how often wireless clients have to resend usernames and passwords in order to stay connected. Enter a time interval between 10 and 2147483647 seconds. Note: If wireless client authentication is done using a RADIUS server, the reauthentication timer on the RADIUS server has priority. Group Key Update Timer The Group Key Update Timer is the rate at which the RADIUS server sends a new group key out to all clients. Authentication Server IP Address Enter the IP address of the external authentication server in dotted decimal notation. Port Number Enter the port number of the external authentication server. The default port number is 1812. You need not change this value unless your network administrator instructs you to do so with additional information. Shared Secret Enter a password (up to 31 alphanumeric characters) as the key to be shared between the external authentication server and the CellPipe 7130 RG. The key must be the same on the external authentication server and your CellPipe 7130 RG. The key is not sent over the network. 7.4.5 MAC Filter This screen allows you to configure the CellPipe 7130 RG to give exclusive access to specific devices (Allow) or exclude specific devices from accessing the CellPipe 7130 RG (Deny). Every Ethernet device has a unique MAC (Media Access Control) address. The MAC address is assigned at the factory and consists of six pairs of hexadecimal characters, for example, 00:A0:C5:00:00:02. You need to know the MAC addresses of the devices to configure this screen. 150 CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide Chapter 7 Wireless LAN Use this screen to change your CellPipe 7130 RG’s MAC filter settings. Click the Edit button in the Wireless LAN > General screen. The following screen displays. Figure 44 Wireless LAN > MAC Filter The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 34 Wireless LAN > MAC Filter LABEL MAC Restrict Mode DESCRIPTION Define the filter action for the list of MAC addresses in the table below. Select Disabled to turn off MAC address filtering. Select Allow to permit access to the CellPipe 7130 RG, MAC addresses not listed will be denied access to the CellPipe 7130 RG. Select Deny to block access to the CellPipe 7130 RG, MAC addresses not listed will be allowed to access the CellPipe 7130 RG This is the index number of the MAC address. MAC Address This is the MAC addresses of the wireless devices that are allowed or denied access to the CellPipe 7130 RG. Modify Click the Remove icon to delete the entry. Back Click this to return to the previous screen without saving changes. Add Click this to create a new MAC filtering rule. 7.4.6 Adding a New MAC Filtering Rule Click the Add button in the MAC Filter screen. The following screen displays. Figure 45 Wireless LAN > MAC Filter > Add CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 151 Chapter 7 Wireless LAN The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 35 Wireless LAN > MAC Filter > Add LABEL DESCRIPTION MAC Address Enter the MAC addresses of the wireless devices that are allowed or denied access to the CellPipe 7130 RG in these address fields. Enter the MAC addresses in a valid MAC address format, that is, six hexadecimal character pairs, for example, 12:34:56:78:9a:bc. Back Click this to return to the previous screen without saving changes. Apply Click this to save your changes and go back to the previous screen. 7.5 The More AP Screen This screen allows you to enable and configure multiple wireless networks on the CellPipe 7130 RG. Click Network > Wireless LAN > More AP. The following screen displays. Figure 46 Network > Wireless LAN > More AP The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 36 Network > Wireless LAN > More AP LABEL DESCRIPTION This is the index number of each SSID profile. Active Select the check box to activate an SSID profile. SSID An SSID profile is the set of parameters relating to one of the CellPipe 7130 RG’s BSSs. The SSID (Service Set IDentifier) identifies the Service Set with which a wireless device is associated. This field displays the name of the wireless profile on the network. When a wireless client scans for an AP to associate with, this is the name that is broadcast and seen in the wireless client utility. 152 Security This field indicates the security mode of the SSID profile. Modify Click the Edit icon to configure the SSID profile. CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide Chapter 7 Wireless LAN Table 36 Network > Wireless LAN > More AP LABEL DESCRIPTION Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the CellPipe 7130 RG. Reset Click Reset to reload the previous configuration for this screen. 7.5.1 More AP Edit Use this screen to edit an SSID profile. Click the Edit icon next to an SSID in the More AP screen. The following screen displays. Figure 47 Network > Wireless LAN > More AP: Edit See Section 7.4 on page 143 for more details about the fields in this screen. 7.6 The WPS Screen Use this screen to configure WiFi Protected Setup (WPS) on your CellPipe 7130 RG. WPS allows you to quickly set up a wireless network with strong security, without having to configure security settings manually. Set up each WPS connection between two devices. Both devices must support WPS. CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 153 Chapter 7 Wireless LAN Click Network > Wireless LAN >WPS. The following screen displays. Figure 48 Network > Wireless LAN > WPS The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 37 Network > Wireless LAN > WPS LABEL DESCRIPTION WPS Setup Enable WPS Select the check box to activate WPS on the CellPipe 7130 RG. PIN Number This shows the PIN (Personal Identification Number) of the CellPipe 7130 RG. Enter this PIN in the configuration utility of the device you want to connect to using WPS. The PIN is not necessary when you use WPS push-button method. Generate WPS Status Click this button to have the CellPipe 7130 RG create a new PIN. This displays Configured when the CellPipe 7130 RG has connected to a wireless network using WPS or Enable WPS is selected and wireless or wireless security settings have been changed. The current wireless and wireless security settings also appear in the screen. This displays Unconfigured if WPS is disabled and there is no wireless or wireless security changes on the CellPipe 7130 RG or you click Release_Configuration to remove the configured wireless and wireless security settings. Release_Co nfiguration This button is available when the WPS status is Configured but not configurable if you disable WPS. Click this button to remove all configured wireless and wireless security settings for WPS connections on the CellPipe 7130 RG. Apply 154 Click Apply to save your changes back to the CellPipe 7130 RG. CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide Chapter 7 Wireless LAN 7.7 The WPS Station Screen Use this screen to set up a WPS wireless network using either Push Button Configuration (PBC) or PIN Configuration. Note: If you select No Security in the Wireless LAN > General screen and click Push Button in the WPS Station screen, the CellPipe 7130 RG automatically changes to use WPA-PSK/WPA2-PSK mixed mode and generates a preshared key. Click Network > Wireless LAN > WPS Station. The following screen displays. Figure 49 Network > Wireless LAN > WPS Station The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 38 Network > Wireless LAN > WPS Station LABEL DESCRIPTION Push Button Click this button to add another WPS-enabled wireless device (within wireless range of the CellPipe 7130 RG) to your wireless network. This button may either be a physical button on the outside of device, or a menu button similar to the Push Button on this screen. Note: You must press the other wireless device’s WPS button within two minutes of pressing this button. Or input station's PIN number Enter the PIN of the device that you are setting up a WPS connection with and click Start to authenticate and add the wireless device to your wireless network. You can find the PIN either on the outside of the device, or by checking the device’s settings. Note: You must also activate WPS on that device within two minutes to have it present its PIN to the CellPipe 7130 RG. CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 155 Chapter 7 Wireless LAN 7.8 The WDS Screen A Wireless Distribution System (WDS) is a wireless connection between two or more APs. Use this screen to set up your WDS links between the CellPipe 7130 RGs. You need to know the MAC address of the peer device. Once the security settings of peer sides match one another, the connection between the devices is made. Note: You cannot use WDS when WPS is enabled or wireless security is set to “WPA" or "WPA2". The wireless security settings apply to both WDS links and the connections between the CellPipe 7130 RG and any wireless clients. Note: At the time of writing, WDS is only compatible with other CellPipe 7130 RGs of the same model. Click Network > Wireless LAN > WDS. The following screen displays. WDS is turned on and this screen is configurable when the CellPipe 7130 RG's wireless security mode is No Security, WEP or WPA(2)-PSK. Figure 50 Network > Wireless LAN > WDS 156 CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide Chapter 7 Wireless LAN The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 39 Network > Wireless LAN > WDS LABEL DESCRIPTION WDS Operating Mode Select the operating mode for your CellPipe 7130 RG. • • Access Point + Bridge - The CellPipe 7130 RG functions as a bridge and access point simultaneously. Wireless Bridge - The CellPipe 7130 RG acts as a wireless network bridge and establishes wireless links with other APs. In this mode, clients cannot connect to the CellPipe 7130 RG wirelessly. You need to know the MAC address of the peer device, which must be of the same model and also WDS-enabled. The CellPipe 7130 RG can establish up to four wireless links with other APs. Bridge Restrict This field is available only when you set operating mode to Access Point + Bridge. Select Enabled to turn on WDS and enter the peer device’s MAC address manually in the table below. Select Enabled(Scan) to turn on WDS, search and display the available APs within range in the table below. Remote Bridges MAC Address Enter the MAC address of the peer device that your CellPipe 7130 RG wants to make a bridge connection with. You can connect to up to 4 peer devices. This field is available only when you select Enabled(Scan) in the Bridge Restrict field. Select the check box and click Apply to have the CellPipe 7130 RG establish a wireless link with the selected wireless device. SSID This field is available only when you select Enabled(Scan) in the Bridge Restrict field. This shows the SSID of the available wireless device within range. BSSID This field is available only when you select Enabled(Scan) in the Bridge Restrict field. This shows the MAC address of the available wireless device within range. Refresh Click Refresh to update the Remote Bridges MAC Address table when Bridge Restrict is set to Enabled(Scan). Apply Click Apply to save your changes to CellPipe 7130 RG. CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 157 Chapter 7 Wireless LAN 7.9 The Advanced Setup Screen To configure advanced wireless settings, click Network > Wireless LAN > Advanced Setup. The screen appears as shown. Figure 51 Wireless LAN > Advanced Setup The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 40 Wireless LAN > Advanced Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION RTS/CTS Threshold Enter a value between 0 and 2432. Fragmentation Threshold This is the maximum data fragment size that can be sent. Enter a value between 256 and 2432. Number of Wireless Stations Allowed Specify the maximum number (from 1 to 64) of the wireless stations that may connect to the CellPipe 7130 RG. Output Power Set the output power of the CellPipe 7130 RG. If there is a high density of APs in an area, decrease the output power to reduce interference with other APs. Select one of the following 20%, 40%, 60%, 80% or 100%. Multicast Rate Select a data rate at which the CellPipe 7130 RG transmits wireless multicast traffic. If you select a high rate, multicast traffic may occupy all the bandwidth and cause metwork congestion. 158 CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide Chapter 7 Wireless LAN Table 40 Wireless LAN > Advanced Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION 802.11 Mode Select 802.11b Only to only allow IEEE 802.11b compliant WLAN devices to associate with the CellPipe 7130 RG. Select 802.11g Only to allow IEEE 802.11g compliant WLAN devices to associate with the CellPipe 7130 RG. IEEE 802.11b compliant WLAN devices can associate with the CellPipe 7130 RG only when they use the short premble type. Select 802.11n Only to only allow IEEE 802.11n compliant WLAN devices to associate with the CellPipe 7130 RG. This can increase transmission rates, although IEEE 802.11b or IEEE 802.11g clients will not be able to connect to the CellPipe 7130 RG. Select 802.11b/g Mixed to allow either IEEE 802.11b or IEEE 802.11g compliant WLAN devices to associate with the CellPipe 7130 RG. The CellPipe 7130 RG adjusts the transmission rate automatically according to the wireless standard supported by the wireless devices. Select 802.11 b/g/n mixed mode to allow both IEEE802.11b, IEEE802.11g and IEEE802.11n compliant WLAN devices to associate with the CellPipe 7130 RG. The transmission rate of your CellPipe 7130 RG might be reduced. 802.11 Protection Enabling this feature can help prevent collisions in mixed-mode networks (networks with both IEEE 802.11b and IEEE 802.11g traffic). Select Auto to have the wireless devices transmit data after a RTS/CTS handshake. This helps improve IEEE 802.11g performance. Select Off to disable 802.11 protection. The transmission rate of your CellPipe 7130 RG might be reduced in a mixed-mode network. This field displays Off and is not configurable when you set 802.11 Mode to 802.11b Only. Preamble Select a preamble type from the drop-down list menu. Choices are Long or Short. The default setting is Long. See the appendix for more information. This field is not configurable and the CellPipe 7130 RG uses Short when you set 802.11 Mode to 802.11g Only or 802.11n Only. Apply Click this to save your changes back to the CellPipe 7130 RG. Reset Click this to reload the previous configuration for this screen. 7.10 Technical Reference This section discusses wireless LANs in depth. For more information, see the appendix. CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 159 Chapter 7 Wireless LAN 7.10.1 Wireless Network Overview The following figure provides an example of a wireless network. Figure 52 Example of a Wireless Network AP The wireless network is the part in the blue circle. In this wireless network, devices A and B use the access point (AP) to interact with the other devices (such as the printer) or with the Internet. Your CellPipe 7130 RG is the AP. Every wireless network must follow these basic guidelines. • Every device in the same wireless network must use the same SSID. The SSID is the name of the wireless network. It stands for Service Set IDentity. • If two wireless networks overlap, they should use a different channel. Like radio stations or television channels, each wireless network uses a specific channel, or frequency, to send and receive information. • Every device in the same wireless network must use security compatible with the AP. Security stops unauthorized devices from using the wireless network. It can also protect the information that is sent in the wireless network. 160 CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide Chapter 7 Wireless LAN 7.10.2 Additional Wireless Terms The following table describes some wireless network terms and acronyms used in the CellPipe 7130 RG’s Web Configurator. Table 41 Additional Wireless Terms TERM DESCRIPTION RTS/CTS Threshold In a wireless network which covers a large area, wireless devices are sometimes not aware of each other’s presence. This may cause them to send information to the AP at the same time and result in information colliding and not getting through. By setting this value lower than the default value, the wireless devices must sometimes get permission to send information to the CellPipe 7130 RG. The lower the value, the more often the devices must get permission. If this value is greater than the fragmentation threshold value (see below), then wireless devices never have to get permission to send information to the CellPipe 7130 RG. Preamble A preamble affects the timing in your wireless network. There are two preamble modes: long and short. If a device uses a different preamble mode than the CellPipe 7130 RG does, it cannot communicate with the CellPipe 7130 RG. Authentication The process of verifying whether a wireless device is allowed to use the wireless network. Fragmentation Threshold A small fragmentation threshold is recommended for busy networks, while a larger threshold provides faster performance if the network is not very busy. 7.10.3 Wireless Security Overview The following sections introduce different types of wireless security you can set up in the wireless network. 7.10.3.1 SSID Normally, the CellPipe 7130 RG acts like a beacon and regularly broadcasts the SSID in the area. You can hide the SSID instead, in which case the CellPipe 7130 RG does not broadcast the SSID. In addition, you should change the default SSID to something that is difficult to guess. This type of security is fairly weak, however, because there are ways for unauthorized wireless devices to get the SSID. In addition, unauthorized wireless devices can still see the information that is sent in the wireless network. 7.10.3.2 MAC Address Filter Every device that can use a wireless network has a unique identification number, called a MAC address.1 A MAC address is usually written using twelve hexadecimal CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 161 Chapter 7 Wireless LAN characters2; for example, 00A0C5000002 or 00:A0:C5:00:00:02. To get the MAC address for each device in the wireless network, see the device’s User’s Guide or other documentation. You can use the MAC address filter to tell the CellPipe 7130 RG which devices are allowed or not allowed to use the wireless network. If a device is allowed to use the wireless network, it still has to have the correct information (SSID, channel, and security). If a device is not allowed to use the wireless network, it does not matter if it has the correct information. This type of security does not protect the information that is sent in the wireless network. Furthermore, there are ways for unauthorized wireless devices to get the MAC address of an authorized device. Then, they can use that MAC address to use the wireless network. 7.10.3.3 User Authentication Authentication is the process of verifying whether a wireless device is allowed to use the wireless network. You can make every user log in to the wireless network before they can use it. However, every device in the wireless network has to support IEEE 802.1x to do this. For wireless networks, you can store the user names and passwords for each user in a RADIUS server. This is a server used in businesses more than in homes. If you do not have a RADIUS server, you cannot set up user names and passwords for your users. Unauthorized wireless devices can still see the information that is sent in the wireless network, even if they cannot use the wireless network. Furthermore, there are ways for unauthorized wireless users to get a valid user name and password. Then, they can use that user name and password to use the wireless network. 7.10.3.4 Encryption Wireless networks can use encryption to protect the information that is sent in the wireless network. Encryption is like a secret code. If you do not know the secret code, you cannot understand the message. 162 1. Some wireless devices, such as scanners, can detect wireless networks but cannot use wireless networks. These kinds of wireless devices might not have MAC addresses. 2. Hexadecimal characters are 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, A, B, C, D, E, and F. CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide Chapter 7 Wireless LAN The types of encryption you can choose depend on the type of authentication. (See Section 7.10.3.3 on page 162 for information about this.) Table 42 Types of Encryption for Each Type of Authentication NO AUTHENTICATION RADIUS SERVER Weakest No Security Static WEP WPA-PSK WPA Stronges WPA2-PSK WPA2 For example, if the wireless network has a RADIUS server, you can choose WPA or WPA2. If users do not log in to the wireless network, you can choose no encryption, Static WEP, WPA-PSK, or WPA2-PSK. Usually, you should set up the strongest encryption that every device in the wireless network supports. For example, suppose you have a wireless network with the CellPipe 7130 RG and you do not have a RADIUS server. Therefore, there is no authentication. Suppose the wireless network has two devices. Device A only supports WEP, and device B supports WEP and WPA. Therefore, you should set up Static WEP in the wireless network. Note: It is recommended that wireless networks use WPA-PSK, WPA, or stronger encryption. The other types of encryption are better than none at all, but it is still possible for unauthorized wireless devices to figure out the original information pretty quickly. When you select WPA2 or WPA2-PSK in your CellPipe 7130 RG, you can also select an option (WPA compatible) to support WPA as well. In this case, if some of the devices support WPA and some support WPA2, you should set up WPA2PSK or WPA2 (depending on the type of wireless network login) and select the WPA compatible option in the CellPipe 7130 RG. Many types of encryption use a key to protect the information in the wireless network. The longer the key, the stronger the encryption. Every device in the wireless network must have the same key. 7.10.4 WiFi Protected Setup Your CellPipe 7130 RG supports WiFi Protected Setup (WPS), which is an easy way to set up a secure wireless network. WPS is an industry standard specification, defined by the WiFi Alliance. WPS allows you to quickly set up a wireless network with strong security, without having to configure security settings manually. Each WPS connection works CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 163 Chapter 7 Wireless LAN between two devices. Both devices must support WPS (check each device’s documentation to make sure). Depending on the devices you have, you can either press a button (on the device itself, or in its configuration utility) or enter a PIN (a unique Personal Identification Number that allows one device to authenticate the other) in each of the two devices. When WPS is activated on a device, it has two minutes to find another device that also has WPS activated. Then, the two devices connect and set up a secure network by themselves. 7.10.4.1 Push Button Configuration WPS Push Button Configuration (PBC) is initiated by pressing a button on each WPS-enabled device, and allowing them to connect automatically. You do not need to enter any information. Not every WPS-enabled device has a physical WPS button. Some may have a WPS PBC button in their configuration utilities instead of or in addition to the physical button. Take the following steps to set up WPS using the button. Ensure that the two devices you want to set up are within wireless range of one another. Look for a WPS button on each device. If the device does not have one, log into its configuration utility and locate the button (see the device’s User’s Guide for how to do this - for the CellPipe 7130 RG, see Section 7.7 on page 155). Press the button on one of the devices (it doesn’t matter which). For the CellPipe 7130 RG you must press the WPS button for more than three seconds. Within two minutes, press the button on the other device. The registrar sends the network name (SSID) and security key through an secure connection to the enrollee. If you need to make sure that WPS worked, check the list of associated wireless clients in the AP’s configuration utility. If you see the wireless client in the list, WPS was successful. 7.10.4.2 PIN Configuration Each WPS-enabled device has its own PIN (Personal Identification Number). This may either be static (it cannot be changed) or dynamic (in some devices you can generate a new PIN by clicking on a button in the configuration interface). 164 CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide Chapter 7 Wireless LAN Use the PIN method instead of the push-button configuration (PBC) method if you want to ensure that the connection is established between the devices you specify, not just the first two devices to activate WPS in range of each other. However, you need to log into the configuration interfaces of both devices to use the PIN method. When you use the PIN method, you must enter the PIN from one device (usually the wireless client) into the second device (usually the Access Point or wireless router). Then, when WPS is activated on the first device, it presents its PIN to the second device. If the PIN matches, one device sends the network and security information to the other, allowing it to join the network. Take the following steps to set up a WPS connection between an access point or wireless router (referred to here as the AP) and a client device using the PIN method. Ensure WPS is enabled on both devices. Access the WPS section of the AP’s configuration interface. See the device’s User’s Guide for how to do this. Look for the client’s WPS PIN; it will be displayed either on the device, or in the WPS section of the client’s configuration interface (see the device’s User’s Guide for how to find the WPS PIN - for the CellPipe 7130 RG, see Section 7.6 on page 153). Enter the client’s PIN in the AP’s configuration interface. Note: If the client device’s configuration interface has an area for entering another device’s PIN, you can either enter the client’s PIN in the AP, or enter the AP’s PIN in the client - it does not matter which. Start WPS on both devices within two minutes. Note: Use the configuration utility to activate WPS, not the push-button on the device itself. On a computer connected to the wireless client, try to connect to the Internet. If you can connect, WPS was successful. If you cannot connect, check the list of associated wireless clients in the AP’s configuration utility. If you see the wireless client in the list, WPS was successful. CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 165 Chapter 7 Wireless LAN The following figure shows a WPS-enabled wireless client (installed in a notebook computer) connecting to the WPS-enabled AP via the PIN method. Figure 53 Example WPS Process: PIN Method ENROLLEE REGISTRAR WPS This device’s WPS PIN: 123456 WPS Enter WPS PIN from other device: WPS START WPS START WITHIN 2 MINUTES SECURE EAP TUNNEL SSID WPA(2)-PSK COMMUNICATION 7.10.4.3 How WPS Works When two WPS-enabled devices connect, each device must assume a specific role. One device acts as the registrar (the device that supplies network and security settings) and the other device acts as the enrollee (the device that receives network and security settings. The registrar creates a secure EAP (Extensible Authentication Protocol) tunnel and sends the network name (SSID) and the WPAPSK or WPA2-PSK pre-shared key to the enrollee. Whether WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK is used depends on the standards supported by the devices. If the registrar is already part of a network, it sends the existing information. If not, it generates the SSID and WPA(2)-PSK randomly. 166 CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide Chapter 7 Wireless LAN The following figure shows a WPS-enabled client (installed in a notebook computer) connecting to a WPS-enabled access point. Figure 54 How WPS works ACTIVATE WPS ACTIVATE WPS WITHIN 2 MINUTES WPS HANDSHAKE REGISTRAR ENROLLEE SECURE TUNNEL SECURITY INFO COMMUNICATION The roles of registrar and enrollee last only as long as the WPS setup process is active (two minutes). The next time you use WPS, a different device can be the registrar if necessary. The WPS connection process is like a handshake; only two devices participate in each WPS transaction. If you want to add more devices you should repeat the process with one of the existing networked devices and the new device. Note that the access point (AP) is not always the registrar, and the wireless client is not always the enrollee. All WPS-certified APs can be a registrar, and so can some WPS-enabled wireless clients. By default, a WPS devices is “unconfigured”. This means that it is not part of an existing network and can act as either enrollee or registrar (if it supports both functions). If the registrar is unconfigured, the security settings it transmits to the enrollee are randomly-generated. Once a WPS-enabled device has connected to another device using WPS, it becomes “configured”. A configured wireless client can still act as enrollee or registrar in subsequent WPS connections, but a configured access point can no longer act as enrollee. It will be the registrar in all subsequent WPS connections in which it is involved. If you want a configured AP to act as an enrollee, you must reset it to its factory defaults. CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 167 Chapter 7 Wireless LAN 7.10.4.4 Example WPS Network Setup This section shows how security settings are distributed in an example WPS setup. The following figure shows an example network. In step 1, both AP1 and Client 1 are unconfigured. When WPS is activated on both, they perform the handshake. In this example, AP1 is the registrar, and Client 1 is the enrollee. The registrar randomly generates the security information to set up the network, since it is unconfigured and has no existing information. Figure 55 WPS: Example Network Step 1 ENROLLEE REGISTRAR SECURITY INFO AP1 CLIENT 1 In step 2, you add another wireless client to the network. You know that Client 1 supports registrar mode, but it is better to use AP1 for the WPS handshake with the new client since you must connect to the access point anyway in order to use the network. In this case, AP1 must be the registrar, since it is configured (it already has security information for the network). AP1 supplies the existing security information to Client 2. Figure 56 WPS: Example Network Step 2 REGISTRAR EXISTING CONNECTION AP1 CLIENT 1 ENROLLEE YI RIT SE NF CLIENT 2 In step 3, you add another access point (AP2) to your network. AP2 is out of range of AP1, so you cannot use AP1 for the WPS handshake with the new access 168 CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide Chapter 7 Wireless LAN point. However, you know that Client 2 supports the registrar function, so you use it to perform the WPS handshake instead. Figure 57 WPS: Example Network Step 3 EXISTING CONNECTION CLIENT 1 TIO EC ON GC XIS AP1 REGISTRAR CLIENT 2 SE CU RIT ENROLLEE INF AP2 7.10.4.5 Limitations of WPS WPS has some limitations of which you should be aware. • WPS works in Infrastructure networks only (where an AP and a wireless client communicate). It does not work in Ad-Hoc networks (where there is no AP). • When you use WPS, it works between two devices only. You cannot enroll multiple devices simultaneously, you must enroll one after the other. For instance, if you have two enrollees and one registrar you must set up the first enrollee (by pressing the WPS button on the registrar and the first enrollee, for example), then check that it successfully enrolled, then set up the second device in the same way. • WPS works only with other WPS-enabled devices. However, you can still add non-WPS devices to a network you already set up using WPS. WPS works by automatically issuing a randomly-generated WPA-PSK or WPA2PSK pre-shared key from the registrar device to the enrollee devices. Whether the network uses WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK depends on the device. You can check the configuration interface of the registrar device to discover the key the network is using (if the device supports this feature). Then, you can enter the key into the non-WPS device and join the network as normal (the non-WPS device must also support WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK). CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 169 Chapter 7 Wireless LAN • When you use the PBC method, there is a short period (from the moment you press the button on one device to the moment you press the button on the other device) when any WPS-enabled device could join the network. This is because the registrar has no way of identifying the “correct” enrollee, and cannot differentiate between your enrollee and a rogue device. This is a possible way for a hacker to gain access to a network. You can easily check to see if this has happened. WPS works between only two devices simultaneously, so if another device has enrolled your device will be unable to enroll, and will not have access to the network. If this happens, open the access point’s configuration interface and look at the list of associated clients (usually displayed by MAC address). It does not matter if the access point is the WPS registrar, the enrollee, or was not involved in the WPS handshake; a rogue device must still associate with the access point to gain access to the network. Check the MAC addresses of your wireless clients (usually printed on a label on the bottom of the device). If there is an unknown MAC address you can remove it or reset the AP. 170 CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide CHAPTER Network Address Translation (NAT) 8.1 Overview This chapter discusses how to configure NAT on the CellPipe 7130 RG. Network Address Translation (NAT, RFC 1631) is the translation of the IP address of a host in a packet, for example, the source address of an outgoing packet, used within one network to a different IP address known within another network. 8.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter • The Port Forwarding screen lets you configure forward incoming service requests to the server(s) on your local network (Section 8.3 on page 172). • The DMZ Host screen lets you configure a default server (Section 8.4 on page 176). • The ALG screen lets you enable SIP ALG on the CellPipe 7130 RG (Section 8.5 on page 177). 8.2 What You Need to Know The following terms and concepts may help as you read through this chapter. NAT In the simplest form, NAT changes the source IP address in a packet received from a subscriber (the inside local address) to another (the inside global address) before forwarding the packet to the WAN side. When the response comes back, NAT translates the destination address (the inside global address) back to the inside local address before forwarding it to the original inside host. CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 171 Chapter 8 Network Address Translation (NAT) Port Forwarding A port forwarding set is a list of inside (behind NAT on the LAN) servers, for example, web or FTP, that you can make visible to the outside world even though NAT makes your whole inside network appear as a single computer to the outside world. 8.3 The Port Forwarding Screen This summary screen provides a summary of all port forwarding rules and their configuration. In addition, this screen allows you to create new port forwarding rules and delete existing rules. You may enter a single port number or a range of port numbers to be forwarded, and the local IP address of the desired server. The port number identifies a service; for example, web service is on port 80 and FTP on port 21. In some cases, such as for unknown services or where one server can support more than one service (for example both FTP and web service), it might be better to specify a range of port numbers. You can allocate a server IP address that corresponds to a port or a range of ports. Note: Many residential broadband ISP accounts do not allow you to run any server processes (such as a Web or FTP server) from your location. Your ISP may periodically check for servers and may suspend your account if it discovers any active services at your location. If you are unsure, refer to your ISP. To access this screen, click Network > NAT. The following screen appears. Figure 58 NAT Port Forwarding 172 CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide Chapter 8 Network Address Translation (NAT) The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 43 NAT Port Forwarding LABEL DESCRIPTION Service Name Select a pre-defined service from the drop-down list box. The predefined service port number(s) and protocol will display in the External port, Internal port and Protocol fields. Otherwise, select User Define to open the Rule Setup screen where you can manually enter the port number(s) and select the IP protocol. WAN Interface Select the WAN interface through which the service is forwarded. You must have already configured a WAN connection with NAT enabled. Server IP Address Enter the IP address of the server for the specified service. External Port Start Enter the original destination port for the packets. To forward only one port, enter the port number again in the External Port End field. To forward a series of ports, enter the start port number here and the end port number in the External Port End field. External Port End Enter the last port of the original destination port range. To forward only one port, enter the port number in the External Port Start field above and then enter it again in this field. To forward a series of ports, enter the last port number in a series that begins with the port number in the External Port Start field above. Internal Port Start Enter the port number to which you want the CellPipe 7130 RG to translate the incoming port. To forward only one port, enter the port number again in the Internal Port End field. For a range of ports, enter the first number of the range to which you want the incoming ports translated. Internal Port End Enter the last port of the translated port range. Protocol This is the transport layer protocol used for the service. Time Start (24H) Specify the hour and minute when the port forwarding schedule begins. Hour - 0 - 23 Minute - 0 - 59 The time is in 24-hour format, for example 15:00 is 3:00 PM. Time Stop (24H) Specify the hour and minute when the port forwarding schedule stops. Hour - 0 - 23 Minute - 0 - 59 The time is in 24-hour format, for example 15:00 is 3:00 PM. Select Days Select each day of the week the recurring schedule is effective. Add Click this button to add a rule to the table below. CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 173 Chapter 8 Network Address Translation (NAT) Table 43 NAT Port Forwarding (continued) LABEL DESCRIPTION No. This is the rule index number (read-only). Active This field indicates whether the rule is active or not. Clear the check box to disable the rule. Select the check box to enable it. Service Name This field displays the name of the service used by the packets for this virtual server. WAN Interface This field displays the WAN interface through which the service is forwarded. External Start Port This is the first external port number that identifies a service. External End Port This is the last external port number that identifies a service. Internal Start Port This is the first internal port number that identifies a service. Internal End Port This is the last internal port number that identifies a service. Server IP Address This field displays the inside IP address of the server. Time Start (24H) This displays the time at which the port forwarding schedule begins. Time Stop (24H) This displays the time at which the port forwarding schedule ends. Days This displays the day(s) of the week the recurring schedule is effective. Modify Click the Edit icon to go to the screen where you can edit the port forwarding rule. Click the Remove icon to delete an existing port forwarding rule. Note that subsequent rules move up by one when you take this action. 174 Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the CellPipe 7130 RG. Cancel Click Cancel to return to the previous configuration. CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide Chapter 8 Network Address Translation (NAT) 8.3.1 The Port Forwarding Edit Screen This screen lets you create or edit a port forwarding rule. Select User Define in the Service Name field or click the rule’s Edit icon in the Port Forwarding screen to open the following screen. Figure 59 Port Forwarding Edit The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 44 Port Forwarding Edit LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Clear the check box to disable the rule. Select the check box to enable it. This field is not editable if you are configuring a User Define rule. Service Name Enter a name to identify this rule. This field is read-only if you click the Edit icon in the Port Forwarding screen. WAN Interface Select a WAN interface for which you want to configure port forwarding rules. External Start Port Enter the original destination port for the packets. To forward only one port, enter the port number again in the External End Port field. To forward a series of ports, enter the start port number here and the end port number in the External End Port field. External End Port Enter the last port of the original destination port range. To forward only one port, enter the port number in the External Start Port field above and then enter it again in this field. To forward a series of ports, enter the last port number in a series that begins with the port number in the External Start Port field above. Internal Start Port Enter the port number here to which you want the CellPipe 7130 RG to translate the incoming port. For a range of ports, enter the first number of the range to which you want the incoming ports translated. CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 175 Chapter 8 Network Address Translation (NAT) Table 44 Port Forwarding Edit (continued) LABEL DESCRIPTION Internal End Port Enter the last port of the translated port range. Server IP Address Enter the inside IP address of the virtual server here. Protocol Select the transport layer protocol supported by this virtual server. Choices are TCP, UDP, or TCP/UDP. Time Start (24H) Specify the hour and minute when the port forwarding schedule begins. Hour - 0 - 23 Minute - 0 - 59 The time is in 24-hour format, for example 15:00 is 3:00 PM. Time Stop (24H) Specify the hour and minute when the port forwarding schedule stops. Hour - 0 - 23 Minute - 0 - 59 The time is in 24-hour format, for example 15:00 is 3:00 PM. Select Days Select each day of the week the recurring schedule is effective. Back Click Back to return to the previous screen. Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the CellPipe 7130 RG. Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh. 8.4 The DMZ Host Screen In addition to the servers for specified services, NAT supports a default server IP address. A default server receives packets from ports that are not specified in the NAT Port Forwarding Setup screen. Figure 60 NAT > DMZ Host 176 CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide Chapter 8 Network Address Translation (NAT) The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 45 NAT > DMZ Host LABEL DESCRIPTION Default Server Enter the IP address of the default server which receives packets from ports that are not specified in the NAT Port Forwarding screen. Note: If you do not assign a Default Server, the CellPipe 7130 RG discards all packets received for ports that are not specified in the NAT Port Forwarding screen. Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the CellPipe 7130 RG. 8.5 The ALG Screen Some NAT routers may include a SIP Application Layer Gateway (ALG). A SIP ALG allows SIP calls to pass through NAT by examining and translating IP addresses embedded in the data stream. The SIP ALG translates the CellPipe 7130 RG’s private IP address inside the SIP data stream to a public IP address. You do not need to use STUN or an outbound proxy if you enable the SIP ALG. Use this screen to enable or disable the SIP ALG in the CellPipe 7130 RG. To access this screen, click NAT > ALG. Figure 61 NAT > ALG Each field is described in the following table. Table 46 NAT > ALG LABEL DESCRIPTION Active SIP ALG Select this check box to allow SIP sessions to pass through the CellPipe 7130 RG. SIP is a signaling protocol used in sending of voice signals over Internet Protocol. Apply Click Apply to save your customized settings. Wait for the CellPipe 7130 RG to fully reboot before accessing it again. CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 177 Chapter 8 Network Address Translation (NAT) 8.6 Technical Reference The following section contains additional technical information about the CellPipe 7130 RG features described in this chapter. Port Forwarding: Services and Port Numbers The most often used port numbers are shown in the following table. Please refer to RFC 1700 for further information about port numbers. Please also refer to the Supporting CD for more examples and details on port forwarding and NAT. Table 47 Services and Port Numbers SERVICES PORT NUMBER ECHO FTP (File Transfer Protocol) 21 SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol) 25 DNS (Domain Name System) 53 Finger 79 HTTP (Hyper Text Transfer protocol or WWW, Web) 80 POP3 (Post Office Protocol) 110 NNTP (Network News Transport Protocol) 119 SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) 161 SNMP trap 162 PPTP (Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol) 1723 Port Forwarding Example Let's say you want to assign ports 21-25 to one FTP, Telnet and SMTP server (A in the example), port 80 to another (B in the example) and assign a default server IP address of 192.168.1.35 to a third (C in the example). You assign the LAN IP 178 CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide Chapter 8 Network Address Translation (NAT) addresses and the ISP assigns the WAN IP address. The NAT network appears as a single host on the Internet. Figure 62 Multiple Servers Behind NAT Example A=192.168.1.33 192.168.1.1 B=192.168.1.34 IP address assigned by ISP C=192.168.1.35 CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide D=192.168.1.36 179 Chapter 8 Network Address Translation (NAT) 180 CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide CHAPTER File Sharing 9.1 Overview Share files on a USB memory stick or hard drive connected to your CellPipe 7130 RG with users on your network. The following figure is an overview of the CellPipe 7130 RG’s file server feature. Computers A and B can access files on a USB device (C) which is connected to the CellPipe 7130 RG. Figure 63 File Sharing Overview • See Section 9.1.2 on page 182 for an explanation of file-sharing terms. • See Section 9.2.1 on page 184 for file-sharing examples. 9.1.1 What You Can Do in this chapter Use the File Sharing screen (Section 9.2 on page 183) to enable file-sharing server on the CellPipe 7130 RG and configure the workgroup name. CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 181 Chapter 9 File Sharing 9.1.2 What You Need to Know About File-Sharing Workgroup name This is the name given to a set of computers that are connected on a network and share resources such as a printer or files. Windows automatically assigns the workgroup name when you set up a network. Shares When settings are set to default, each USB device connected to the CellPipe 7130 RG is given a folder, called a “share”. If a USB hard drive connected to the CellPipe 7130 RG has more than one partition, then each partition will be allocated a share. You can also configure a “share” to be a sub-folder or file on the USB device. File Systems A file system is a way of storing and organizing files on your hard drive and storage device. Often different operating systems such as Windows or Linux have different file systems. The file-sharing feature on your CellPipe 7130 RG supports File Allocation Table (FAT) and FAT32 file systems. Windows/CIFS Common Internet File System (CIFS) is a standard protocol supported by most operating systems in order to share files across the network. CIFS runs over TCP/IP but uses the SMB (Server Message Block) protocol found in Microsoft Windows for file and printer access; therefore, CIFS will allow all applications, not just Web browsers, to open and share files across the Internet. The CellPipe 7130 RG uses Common Internet File System (CIFS) protocol for its file sharing functions. CIFS compatible computers can access the USB file storage devices connected to the CellPipe 7130 RG. CIFS protocol is supported on Microsoft Windows, Linux Samba and other operating systems (refer to your systems specifications for CIFS compatibility). NFS Network File System (NFS) is a protocol most commonly used on Unix-like systems in order to share files across the network. Samba SMB is a client-server protocol used by Microsoft Windows systems for sharing files, printers, and so on. 182 CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide Chapter 9 File Sharing Samba is a free SMB server that runs on most Unix and Unix-like systems. It provides an implementation of an SMB client and server for use with non-Microsoft operating systems. File Transfer Protocol This is a method of transferring data from one computer to another over a network such as the Internet. 9.1.3 Before You Begin Make sure the CellPipe 7130 RG is connected to your network and turned on. Connect the USB device to one of the CellPipe 7130 RG’s USB ports. Make sure the CellPipe 7130 RG is connected to your network. The CellPipe 7130 RG detects the USB device and makes its contents available for browsing. If you are connecting a USB hard drive that comes with an external power supply, make sure it is connected to an appropriate power source that is on. Note: If your USB device cannot be detected by CellPipe 7130 RG, see the troubleshooting for suggestions. 9.2 The Server Settings Screen Use this screen to set up file sharing via the CellPipe 7130 RG. To access this screen, click USB Services > File Sharing. Figure 64 USB Services > File Sharing CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 183 Chapter 9 File Sharing Each field is described in the following table. Table 48 USB Services > File Sharing LABEL DESCRIPTION Enable File Sharing Services Select this to enable file sharing through the CellPipe 7130 RG. Server Configuration Host Name This displays the CellPipe 7130 RG system name. Workgroup Name You can add the CellPipe 7130 RG to an existing or a new workgroup on your network. Enter the name of the workgroup which your CellPipe 7130 RG automatically joins. You can set the CellPipe 7130 RG’s workgroup name to be exactly the same as the workgroup name to which your computer belongs to. Note: The CellPipe 7130 RG will not be able to join the workgroup if your local area network has restrictions set up that do not allow devices to join a workgroup. In this case, contact your network administrator. Apply/Save Click this to save your changes to the CellPipe 7130 RG. Reset Click this to set every field in this screen to its last-saved value. 9.2.1 Example of Accessing Your Shared Files From a Computer You can use Windows Explorer to access the file storage devices connected to the CellPipe 7130 RG. Note: The example in this User’s Guide shows you how to use Microsoft’s Windows XP to browse your shared files. Refer to your operating system’s documentation for how to browse your file structure. 184 Open Windows Explorer to share files in the attached USB device using Windows Explorer browser. CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide Chapter 9 File Sharing In Windows Explorer’s Address bar type a double backslash “\\” followed by the IP address of the CellPipe 7130 RG (the default IP address of the CellPipe 7130 RG is 192.168.1.1) and press [ENTER]. A screen asking for password authentication appears. Type the user name and password you use to access the system and click OK. (The default system user name is admin and the default system password is telus.) Figure 65 File Sharing via Windows Explorer Note: Once you log in to the file share via your CellPipe 7130 RG, you do not have to log in again unless you restart your computer. Note: Refer to Section 3.2 on page 83 for user level information. Each user level has its own account information for logging into the CellPipe 7130 RG. CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 185 Chapter 9 File Sharing 186 CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide CHAPTER 10 Media Server 10.1 Overview The media server feature lets anyone on your network play video, music, and photos from a USB storage device connected to your CellPipe 7130 RG (without having to copy them to another computer). The CellPipe 7130 RG can function as a DLNA-compliant media server. The CellPipe 7130 RG streams files to DLNAcompliant media clients, such as the Xbox 360, Playstation 3 and so on. The Digital Living Network Alliance (DLNA) is a group of personal computer and electronics companies that works to make products compatible in a home network. In the following figure, DLNA-compliant devices (B) can play music and video files or view images stored on a USB device (C) that is connected to the CellPipe 7130 RG (A). Figure 66 File Sharing Overview DLNA-compliant clients Refer to Section 2.6 on page 65 for a tutorial on using this feature on Windows 7 and a Digital Media Adapter. CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 187 Chapter 10 Media Server 10.1.1 What You Can Do in this chapter • Use the Media Server Configuration screen (Section 10.3 on page 189) to enable the media server on the CellPipe 7130 RG. • Use the Remove Disk Safely screen (Section 10.3 on page 189) to safely disconnect the USB device from the CellPipe 7130 RG. 10.1.2 Before You Begin Make sure the CellPipe 7130 RG is connected to your network and turned on. Connect the USB device to one of the CellPipe 7130 RG’s USB ports. Make sure the CellPipe 7130 RG is connected to your network. The CellPipe 7130 RG detects the USB device and makes its contents available for browsing. If you are connecting a USB hard drive that comes with an external power supply, make sure it is connected to an appropriate power source that is on. Note: If your USB device cannot be detected by CellPipe 7130 RG, see the troubleshooting for suggestions. 10.2 The Media Server Configuration Screen Use this screen to enable the media server on your CellPipe 7130 RG. To access this screen, click USB Services > Media Server. Figure 67 USB Services > Media Server 188 CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide Chapter 10 Media Server Each field is described in the following table. Table 49 USB Services > Media Server LABEL DESCRIPTION Enable Media Server (DLNA) Select this to turn on the media server and let (DLNA-compliant) media clients on your network play media files located in the published shares. Apply/Save Click this to save your changes to the CellPipe 7130 RG. Cancel Click this to set every field in this screen to its last-saved value. 10.3 The Remove Disk Safely Screen Use this screen to safely remove the USB device from the CellPipe 7130 RG. This stops processes to the USB device and prevents your data from being corrupted. To access this screen, click USB Services > Media Server > Remove Disk Safely. Figure 68 USB Services > Media Server > Remove Disk Safely Each field is described in the following table. Table 50 USB Services > Media Server > Remove Disk Safely LABEL DESCRIPTION Remove Disk Safely Click this stop all processes to the USB device. You can then disconnect the USB device safely. CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 189 Chapter 10 Media Server 190 CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide CHAPTER 11 Firewall 11.1 Overview This chapter shows you how to enable and configure the CellPipe 7130 RG firewall settings. The CellPipe 7130 RG firewall is a packet filtering firewall and restricts access based on the source/destination computer network address of a packet and the type of application. 11.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter • The Incoming screen lets you view and configure incoming IP filtering rules (Section 11.4 on page 195). • The DoS screen lets you activate protection against Denial of Service (DoS) attacks (Section 11.4 on page 195). 11.2 What You Need to Know The following terms and concepts may help as you read through this chapter. Basics Computers share information over the Internet using a common language called TCP/IP. TCP/IP, in turn, is a set of application protocols that perform specific functions. An “extension number”, called the "TCP port" or "UDP port" identifies these protocols, such as HTTP (Web), FTP (File Transfer Protocol), POP3 (E-mail), etc. For example, Web traffic by default uses TCP port 80. When computers communicate on the Internet, they are using the client/server model, where the server "listens" on a specific TCP/UDP port for information requests from remote client computers on the network. For example, a Web server typically listens on port 80. Please note that while a computer may be intended for use over a single port, such as Web on port 80, other ports are also CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 191 Chapter 11 Firewall active. If the person configuring or managing the computer is not careful, a hacker could attack it over an unprotected port. Some of the most common IP ports are: Table 51 Common IP Ports 21 FTP 53 DNS 23 Telnet 80 HTTP 25 SMTP 110 POP3 Default Filtering Policies Filtering rules are grouped based on the direction of travel of packets to which they apply. The default rule for incoming traffic blocks all incoming connections from the WAN to the LAN. If you wish to allow certain WAN users to have access to your LAN, you will need to create custom rules to allow it. Note: If you configure filtering rules without a good understanding of how they work, you might inadvertently introduce security risks to the firewall and to the protected network. Make sure you test your rules after you configure them. These custom rules work by comparing the Source IP address, Destination IP address and IP protocol type of network traffic to rules set by the administrator. Your customized rules take precedence and override the CellPipe 7130 RG’s default rules. Denial of Service (DoS) Denial of Service (DoS) prevents customers, users, clients or other computers from accessing data on a computer. This is usually accomplished by interrupting or overwhelming the computer with bad or excessive information requests. 192 CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide Chapter 11 Firewall 11.3 The Firewall Screen Click Security > Firewall > Incoming to display the following screen. This screen displays a list of the configured incoming filtering rules. Figure 69 Firewall > Incoming The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 52 Firewall > Incoming LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Firewall Select this check box to enable the firewall on the CellPipe 7130 RG. When the firewall is enabled, the CellPipe 7130 RG blocks all incoming traffic from the WAN to the LAN. Create custome rules below to allow certain WAN users to access your LAN or to allow traffic from the WAN to a certain computer on the LAN. Active Select this check box to enable the rule. Filter Name This displays the name of the rule. Interfaces This displays the WAN interface(s) to which this rule is applied. Protocol This displays the transport layer protocol that defines the service to which this rule applies. Source Address / Mask This displays the source IP addresses and subnet mask to which this rule applies. Please note that a blank source address is equivalent to Any. Source Port This is the source port number. Dest. Address / Mask This displays the destination IP addresses and subnet mask to which this rule applies. Please note that a blank destination address is equivalent to Any. Dest. Port This is the destination port number. Start. Time This displays the time at which the firewall schedule begins. Stop. Time This displays the time at which the firewall schedule ends. Week. Days This displays the day(s) of the week the firewall schedule is effective. Modify Click the Edit icon to go to the screen where you can edit the rule. Click the Remove icon to delete an existing rule. Note that subsequent rules move up by one when you take this action. CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 193 Chapter 11 Firewall Table 52 Firewall > Incoming (continued) LABEL DESCRIPTION Add Click Add to create a new rule. Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the CellPipe 7130 RG. 11.3.1 Creating Incoming Firewall Rules In the Incoming screen, click Add to display this screen and refer to the following table for information on the labels. Figure 70 Firewall > Incoming: Add The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 53 Firewall > Incoming: Add LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this check box to enable the rule. Filter Name Enter a descriptive name of up to 16 printable English keyboard characters, including spaces. To add a firewall rule, you need to configure at least one of the following fields (except the Interface field). 194 Protocol Select the transport layer protocol (TCP/UDP, TCP, UDP or ICMP) and enter the protocol (service type) number in the port field. Select NONE to apply the rule to any protocol. Source IP Address Enter the source IP address in dotted decimal notation. Source Subnet Mask Enter the source subnet mask. CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide Chapter 11 Firewall Table 53 Firewall > Incoming: Add (continued) LABEL DESCRIPTION Source Port Enter a single port number or the range of port numbers of the source. Destination IP Address Enter the destination IP address in dotted decimal notation. Destination Subnet Mask Enter the destination subnet mask. Destination Port Enter the port number of the destination. Start Time Specify the hour and minute when the firewall schedule begins. Hour - 0 - 23 Minute - 0 - 59 The time is in 24-hour format, for example 15:00 is 3:00 PM. Stop Time Specify the hour and minute when the firewall schedule stops. Hour - 0 - 23 Minute - 0 - 59 The time is in 24-hour format, for example 15:00 is 3:00 PM. Select Days Select each day of the week the firewall schedule is effective. Interface Select Select All to apply the rule to all interfaces on the CellPipe 7130 RG or select the specific WAN interface(s) to which this rule applies. Back Click Back to return to the previous screen. Apply Click Apply to save your customized settings and exit this screen. 11.4 The DoS Screen Click Security > Firewall > DoS to display the following screen. This lets you turn on protection against DoS attacks. Figure 71 Security > Firewall > DoS CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 195 Chapter 11 Firewall The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 54 Security > Firewall > DoS 196 LABEL DESCRIPTION Active DoS Select this check box to detect and reject old or duplicate packets to protect against Denial-of-Service attacks Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the CellPipe 7130 RG. CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide CHAPTER 12 Certificate 12.1 Overview The CellPipe 7130 RG can use certificates (also called digital IDs) to authenticate users. Certificates are based on public-private key pairs. A certificate contains the certificate owner’s identity and public key. Certificates provide a way to exchange public keys for use in authentication. 12.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter • The Local Certificates screen lets you generate certification requests and import the CellPipe 7130 RG's CA-signed certificates (Section 12.4 on page 204). • The Trusted CA screen lets you save the certificates of trusted CAs to the CellPipe 7130 RG (Section 12.4 on page 204). 12.2 What You Need to Know The following terms and concepts may help as you read through this chapter. Certification Authority A Certification Authority (CA) issues certificates and guarantees the identity of each certificate owner. There are commercial certification authorities like CyberTrust or VeriSign and government certification authorities. The certification authority uses its private key to sign certificates. Anyone can then use the certification authority's public key to verify the certificates. You can use the CellPipe 7130 RG to generate certification requests that contain identifying information and public keys and then send the certification requests to a certification authority. CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 197 Chapter 12 Certificate 12.3 The Local Certificates Screen Click Security > Certificates to open the Local Certificates screen. This is the CellPipe 7130 RG’s summary list of certificates and certification requests. Figure 72 Local Certificates The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 55 Local Certificates LABEL DESCRIPTION Name This field displays the name used to identify this certificate. It is recommended that you give each certificate a unique name. In Use This field displays how many applications use the certificate. Subject This field displays identifying information about the certificate’s owner, such as CN (Common Name), OU (Organizational Unit or department), O (Organization or company) and C (Country). It is recommended that each certificate have unique subject information. Type This field displays what kind of certificate this is. request represents a certification request and is not yet a valid certificate. Send a certification request to a certification authority, which then issues a certificate. Use the Load Certificate screen to import the certificate and replace the request. signed represents a certificate issued by a certification authority. Action Click the View button to open a screen with an in-depth list of information about the certificate (or certification request). Click the Load Signed button to import a valid certification to replace the request. Click the Remove button to delete the certificate (or certification request). You cannot delete a certificate that one or more features is configured to use. 198 CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide Chapter 12 Certificate Table 55 Local Certificates (continued) LABEL DESCRIPTION Create Certificate Request Click this button to go to the screen where you can have the CellPipe 7130 RG generate a certification request. Import Certificate Click this button to open a screen where you can save the certificate that you have enrolled from a certification authority from your computer to the CellPipe 7130 RG. 12.3.1 Create Certificate Request Click Security > Certificates > Local Certificates and then Create Certificate Request to open the My Certificate Create screen. Use this screen to have the CellPipe 7130 RG generate a certification request. Figure 73 Create Certificate Request The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 56 Create Certificate Request LABEL DESCRIPTION Certificate Name Type up to 31 ASCII characters (not including spaces) to identify this certificate. Common Name Select a radio button to identify the certificate’s owner by IP address, domain name or e-mail address. Type the IP address (in dotted decimal notation), domain name or e-mail address in the field provided. The domain name or e-mail address can be up to 31 ASCII characters. The domain name or e-mail address is for identification purposes only and can be any string. Organization Name Type up to 127 characters to identify the company or group to which the certificate owner belongs. You may use any character, including spaces, but the CellPipe 7130 RG drops trailing spaces. State/Province Name Type up to 127 characters to identify the state or province where the certificate owner is located. You may use any character, including spaces, but the CellPipe 7130 RG drops trailing spaces. Country/Region Name Select a country to identify the nation where the certificate owner is located. CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 199 Chapter 12 Certificate Table 56 Create Certificate Request (continued) LABEL DESCRIPTION Back Click Back to return to the previous screen. Apply Click Apply to begin certificate or certification request generation. After you click Apply, the Certificate Request Details screen displays. Click Load Signed Certificate to import a certificate signed by the CA to replace the request (see Section 12.3.4 on page 203). Otherwise, click Back to return to the Local Certificates screen. See Section 12.3.3 on page 202 for field information. Figure 74 Certificate Request Details 12.3.2 Import Certificate Click Security > Certificates > Local Certificates and then Import Certificate to open the Import Local Certificate screen. Follow the instructions in this screen to save an existing certificate to the CellPipe 7130 RG. 200 CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide Chapter 12 Certificate Note: You must remove any spaces from the certificate’s filename before you can import it. Figure 75 Import Local Certificate The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 57 Import Local Certificate LABEL DESCRIPTION Certificate Name Type up to 31 ASCII characters (not including spaces) to identify this certificate. Certificate Copy and paste the certificate into the text box to store it on the CellPipe 7130 RG. Private Key Copy and paste the private key into the text box to store it on the CellPipe 7130 RG. Back Click Back to return to the previous screen. Apply Click Apply to save the certificate on the CellPipe 7130 RG. CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 201 Chapter 12 Certificate 12.3.3 Certificate Details Click Security > Certificates > Local Certificates to open the My Certificates screen (see Figure 72 on page 198). Click the View icon to open the Certificate Details screen. Use this screen to view in-depth certificate information and change the certificate’s name. Figure 76 Certificate Details 202 CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide Chapter 12 Certificate The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 58 Certificate Details LABEL DESCRIPTION Name This field displays the identifying name of this certificate. If you want to change the name, type up to 31 characters to identify this certificate. You may use any character (not including spaces). Type This field displays general information about the certificate. signed means that a Certification Authority signed the certificate. request means this is a certification request. Subject This field displays information that identifies the owner of the certificate, such as Common Name (CN), Organization (O), State (ST) and Country (C). Certificate This read-only text box displays the certificate in Privacy Enhanced Mail (PEM) format. PEM uses 64 ASCII characters to convert the binary certificate into a printable form. This displays null in a certification request. You can copy and paste the certificate into an e-mail to send to friends or colleagues or you can copy and paste the certificate into a text editor and save the file on a management computer for later distribution (via floppy disk for example). Private Key This read-only text box displays the private key in Privacy Enhanced Mail (PEM) format. PEM uses 64 ASCII characters to convert the binary certificate into a printable form. You can copy and paste the private key into an e-mail to send to friends or colleagues or you can copy and paste the certificate into a text editor and save the file on a management computer for later distribution (via floppy disk for example). Signing Request This read-only text box displays the request information in Privacy Enhanced Mail (PEM) format. PEM uses 64 ASCII characters to convert the binary certificate into a printable form. This displays null in a signed certificate. Back Click Back to return to the previous screen. Load Signed Certificate This button is available only in a certification request details screen Click this to import a certificate signed by the CA to replace the request. 12.3.4 Load Signed Certificate Click Security > Certificates > Local Certificates and then Load Signed or the Load Signed Certificate button in the Certificate Details screen of a CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 203 Chapter 12 Certificate certification request to open the Load Certificate screen. Follow the instructions in this screen to save a valid certificate to repalce the request. Figure 77 Load Certificate The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 59 Load Certificate LABEL DESCRIPTION Certificate Name This field is read-only and displays the identifying name of this certificate. Certificate Copy and paste the certificate into the text box to store it on the CellPipe 7130 RG. Back Click Back to return to the previous screen. Apply Click Apply to save the certificate on the CellPipe 7130 RG. 12.4 The Trusted CA Screen Click Advanced Setup > Certificates > Trusted CA to open the following screen. This screen displays a summary list of certificates of the certification authorities that you have set the CellPipe 7130 RG to accept as trusted. The CellPipe 7130 RG accepts any valid certificate signed by a certification authority on 204 CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide Chapter 12 Certificate this list as being trustworthy; thus you do not need to import any certificate that is signed by one of these certification authorities. Figure 78 Trusted CA The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 60 Trusted CA LABEL DESCRIPTION Name This field displays the name used to identify this certificate. Subject This field displays information that identifies the owner of the certificate, such as Common Name (CN), OU (Organizational Unit or department), Organization (O), State (ST) and Country (C). It is recommended that each certificate have unique subject information. Type This field displays general information about the certificate. ca means that a Certification Authority signed the certificate. Action Click View to open a screen with an in-depth list of information about the certificate. Click Remove to delete the certificate. Import Certificate CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide Click this button to open a screen where you can save the certificate of a certification authority that you trust to the CellPipe 7130 RG. 205 Chapter 12 Certificate 12.4.1 View Trusted CA Certificate Click the View button in the Trusted CA screen to open the following screen. Use this screen to view in-depth information about the certification authority’s certificate. Figure 79 Trusted CA: View The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 61 Trusted CA: View 206 LABEL DESCRIPTION Name This field displays the identifying name of this certificate. Type This field displays general information about the certificate. ca means that a Certification Authority signed the certificate. Subject This field displays information that identifies the owner of the certificate, such as Common Name (CN), Organizational Unit (OU), Organization (O) and Country (C). CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide Chapter 12 Certificate Table 61 Trusted CA: View (continued) LABEL DESCRIPTION Certificate This read-only text box displays the certificate in Privacy Enhanced Mail (PEM) format. PEM uses 64 ASCII characters to convert the binary certificate into a printable form. You can copy and paste the certificate into an e-mail to send to friends or colleagues or you can copy and paste the certificate into a text editor and save the file on a management computer for later distribution (via floppy disk for example). Back Click this button to return to the previous screen. 12.4.2 Import Trusted CA Certificate Click the Import Certificate button in the Trusted CA screen to open the following screen. The CellPipe 7130 RG trusts any valid certificate signed by any of the imported trusted CA certificates. Figure 80 Trusted CA: Import Certificate The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 62 Trusted CA: Import Certificate LABEL DESCRIPTION Certificate Name Enter the name that identifies this certificate. Certificate Copy and paste the certificate into the text box to store it on the CellPipe 7130 RG. Back Click this button to return to the previous screen. Apply Click this button to save your changes back to the CellPipe 7130 RG. CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 207 Chapter 12 Certificate 208 CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide CHAPTER 13 Static Route 13.1 Overview The CellPipe 7130 RG usually uses the default gateway to route outbound traffic from computers on the LAN to the Internet. To have the CellPipe 7130 RG send data to devices not reachable through the default gateway, use static routes. For example, the next figure shows a computer (A) connected to the CellPipe 7130 RG’s LAN interface. The CellPipe 7130 RG routes most traffic from A to the Internet through the CellPipe 7130 RG’s default gateway (R1). You create one static route to connect to services offered by your ISP behind router R2. You create another static route to communicate with a separate network behind a router R3 connected to the LAN. Figure 81 Example of Static Routing Topology R1 LAN WAN R3 R2 13.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter The Static Route screens let you view and configure IP static routes on the CellPipe 7130 RG (Section 13.2 on page 210). CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 209 Chapter 13 Static Route 13.2 The Static Route Screen Click Advanced > Static Route to open the Static Route screen. Figure 82 Advanced > Static Route The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 63 Advanced > Static Route LABEL DESCRIPTION This is the number of an individual static route. Active This field indicates whether the rule is active or not. Clear the check box to disable the rule. Select the check box to enable it. 210 Destination This parameter specifies the IP network address of the final destination. Routing is always based on network number. Netmask This parameter specifies the IP network subnet mask of the final destination. Gateway This is the IP address of the gateway. The gateway is a router or switch on the same network segment as the device's LAN or WAN port. The gateway helps forward packets to their destinations. Interface This is the WAN interface through which the traffic is routed. Remove Click the icon to remove a static route from the CellPipe 7130 RG. A window displays asking you to confirm that you want to delete the route. Add Click this to create a new rule. Apply Click this to apply your changes to the CellPipe 7130 RG. CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide Chapter 13 Static Route 13.2.1 Static Route Edit Click the Add button in the Static Route screen. Use this screen to configure the required information for a static route. Figure 83 Static Route: Add The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 64 Static Route: Add LABEL DESCRIPTION Destination IP Address This parameter specifies the IP network address of the final destination. Routing is always based on network number. If you need to specify a route to a single host, use a subnet mask of 255.255.255.255 in the subnet mask field to force the network number to be identical to the host ID. IP Subnet Mask Enter the IP subnet mask here. Use Interface Select a WAN interface through which the traffic is sent. You must have the WAN interface(s) already configured in the WAN screens. Use Gateway IP Address Select this option and enter the IP address of the next-hop gateway. The gateway is a router or switch on the same segment as your CellPipe 7130 RG's interface(s). The gateway helps forward packets to their destinations. Back Click Back to return to the previous screen without saving. Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the CellPipe 7130 RG. Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh. CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 211 Chapter 13 Static Route 212 CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide CHAPTER 14 Policy Forwarding 14.1 Overview Traditionally, routing is based on the destination address only and the CellPipe 7130 RG takes the shortest path to forward a packet. Policy forwarding allows the CellPipe 7130 RG to override the default routing behavior and alter the packet forwarding based on the policy defined by the network administrator. Policy-based routing is applied to outgoing packets, prior to the normal routing. You can use source-based policy forwarding to direct traffic from different users through different connections or distribute traffic among multiple paths for load sharing. 14.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter The Policy Forwarding screens let you view and configure routing policies on the CellPipe 7130 RG (Section 14.2 on page 213). 14.2 The Static Route Screen Click Advanced > Policy Forwarding to open the Policy Forwarding screen. Figure 84 Advanced > Policy Forwarding CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 213 Chapter 14 Policy Forwarding The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 65 Advanced > Policy Forwarding LABEL DESCRIPTION Policy Name This is the name of the rule. SourceIP This is the source IP address. Protocol This is the transport layer protocol. SourcePort This is the source port number. SourceMAC This is the source MAC address. WAN This is the WAN interface through which the traffic is routed. Remove Click the icon to remove a rule from the CellPipe 7130 RG. A window displays asking you to confirm that you want to delete the rule. Add Click this to create a new rule. 14.2.1 Policy Forwarding Setup Click the Add button in the Policy Forwarding screen. Use this screen to configure the required information for a policy route. Figure 85 Policy Forwarding: Add The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 66 Policy Forwarding: Add 214 LABEL DESCRIPTION Policy Name Enter a descriptive name of up to 16 printable English keyboard characters, including spaces. Source IP Address Enter the source IP address. Protocol Select the transport layer protocol (TCP or UDP). Source Port Enter the source port number. Source Mac Address Enter the source MAC address. Use Interface Select a WAN interface through which the traffic is sent. You must have the WAN interface(s) already configured in the WAN screens. Back Click Back to return to the previous screen without saving. CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide Chapter 14 Policy Forwarding Table 66 Policy Forwarding: Add LABEL DESCRIPTION Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the CellPipe 7130 RG. Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh. CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 215 Chapter 14 Policy Forwarding 216 CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide CHAPTER 15 RIP 15.1 Overview Routing Information Protocol (RIP, RFC 1058 and RFC 1389) allows a device to exchange routing information with other routers. 15.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter The RIP screen lets you set up RIP settings on the CellPipe 7130 RG (Section 15.2 on page 217). 15.2 The RIP Screen Click Advanced > RIP to open the RIP screen. Figure 86 Advanced > RIP CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 217 Chapter 15 RIP The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 67 Advanced > RIP LABEL DESCRIPTION Interface This is the name of the interface in which the RIP setting is used. Version The RIP version controls the format and the broadcasting method of the RIP packets that the CellPipe 7130 RG sends (it recognizes both formats when receiving). RIP version 1 is universally supported but RIP version 2 carries more information. RIP version 1 is probably adequate for most networks, unless you have an unusual network topology. Operation Select Passive to have the CellPipe 7130 RG update the routing table based on the RIP packets received from neighbors but not advertise its route information to other routers in this interface. Select Active to have the CellPipe 7130 RG advertise its route information and also listen for routing updates from neighboring routers. 218 Enabled Select the check box to activate the settings. Apply/Save Click Apply/Save to save your changes back to the CellPipe 7130 RG. CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide CHAPTER 16 Quality of Service (QoS) 16.1 Overview Quality of Service (QoS) refers to both a network’s ability to deliver data with minimum delay, and the networking methods used to control the use of bandwidth. Without QoS, all traffic data is equally likely to be dropped when the network is congested. This can cause a reduction in network performance and make the network inadequate for time-critical application such as video-ondemand. Configure QoS on the CellPipe 7130 RG to group and prioritize application traffic and fine-tune network performance. Setting up QoS involves these steps: Configure classifiers to sort traffic into different flows. Assign priority and define actions to be performed for a classified traffic flow. The CellPipe 7130 RG assigns each packet a priority and then queues the packet accordingly. Packets assigned a high priority are processed more quickly than those with low priority if there is congestion, allowing time-sensitive applications to flow more smoothly. Time-sensitive applications include both those that require a low level of latency (delay) and a low level of jitter (variations in delay) such as Internet gaming, and those for which jitter alone is a problem such as Internet radio or streaming video. This chapter contains information about configuring QoS and editing classifiers. CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 219 Chapter 16 Quality of Service (QoS) 16.1.1 QoS Overview The following figure gives an overview of how to configure QoS on this CellPipe 7130 RG: PVC1, ATM QoS 1 PVC2, ATM QoS 2 Queue 1 Queue 2 First, you have to configure WAN connection(s) in Network > WAN > Connect. Refer to Section 2.4 on page 40 for a tutorial on how to prioritize traffic and eliminate congestion over the ATM network (at the ATM layer). Configure queue settings in Advanced > QoS > Queue Setup according to the priority you want to apply to different types of traffic. Configure class settings in Advanced > QoS > Class Setup. This associates queues with PVCs by mapping the priority of queues to the index number of PVCs. 16.1.2 What You Can Do in this Chapter • The General screen lets you lets you enable or disable QoS and set the upstream bandwidth (Section 16.3 on page 221). • The Queue Setup screen lets you lets you configure QoS queue assignment (Section 16.4 on page 222). • The Class Setup screen lets you add, edit or delete QoS classifiers (Section 16.5 on page 225). • The Policer Setup screen lets you specify the committed rate and committed burst size for incoming packets (Section 16.5 on page 225). • The Monitor screen lets you view the CellPipe 7130 RG's QoS-related packet statistics (Section 16.7 on page 233). 16.2 What You Need to Know The following terms and concepts may help as you read through this chapter. 220 CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide Chapter 16 Quality of Service (QoS) QoS versus Cos QoS is used to prioritize source-to-destination traffic flows. All packets in the same flow are given the same priority. CoS (class of service) is a way of managing traffic in a network by grouping similar types of traffic together and treating each type as a class. You can use CoS to give different priorities to different packet types. CoS technologies include IEEE 802.1p layer 2 tagging and DiffServ (Differentiated Services or DS). IEEE 802.1p tagging makes use of three bits in the packet header, while DiffServ is a new protocol and defines a new DS field, which replaces the eight-bit ToS (Type of Service) field in the IP header. Tagging and Marking In a QoS class, you can configure whether to add or change the DSCP (DiffServ Code Point) value, IEEE 802.1p priority level and VLAN ID number in a matched packet. When the packet passes through a compatible network, the networking device, such as a backbone switch, can provide specific treatment or service based on the tag or marker. 16.3 The Quality of Service General Screen Click Advanced Setup > Quality of Service to open the screen as shown next. Use this screen to enable or disable QoS and set the upstream bandwidth. See Section 16.1 on page 219 for more information. Figure 87 QoS General CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 221 Chapter 16 Quality of Service (QoS) The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 68 QoS General LABEL DESCRIPTION Active QoS Select the check box to turn on QoS to improve your network performance. WAN Managed Upstream Bandwidth Enter the amount of upstream bandwidth for the WAN interface that you want to allocate using QoS. The recommendation is to set this speed to match the interface’s actual transmission speed. For example, set the WAN interface speed to 100000 kbps if your Internet connection has an upstream transmission speed of 100 Mbps. You can set this number higher than the interface’s actual transmission speed. The CellPipe 7130 RG uses up to 95% of the DSL port’s actual upstream transmission speed even if you set this number higher than the DSL port’s actual transmission speed. You can also set this number lower than the interface’s actual transmission speed. This will cause the CellPipe 7130 RG to not use some of the interface’s available bandwidth. If you leave this field blank, the CellPipe 7130 RG automatically sets this number to be 95% of the DSL port’s actual upstream transmission speed. Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the CellPipe 7130 RG. Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh. 16.4 The Queue Setup Screen Click QoS > Queue Setup to open the screen as shown next. Use this screen to configure QoS queue assignment. Figure 88 QoS Queue Setup 222 CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide Chapter 16 Quality of Service (QoS) The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 69 QoS Queue Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Add Click this button to create a new entry. No. This is the index number of this entry. Active Select the check box to enable the queue. Name This shows the descriptive name of this queue. Interface This shows the name of the CellPipe 7130 RG’s interface through which traffic in this queue passes. Priority This shows the priority of this queue. Weight This shows the weight of this queue. Buffer Management This shows the queue management algorithm used for this queue. Scheduler Algorithm This shows the scheduling algorithm that the CellPipe 7130 RG uses. Rate Limit This shows the maximum transmission rate allowed for traffic on this queue. Modify Click the Edit icon to go to the screen where you can edit the queue. Queue management algorithms determine how the CellPipe 7130 RG should handle packets when it receives too many (network congestion). A scheduling algorithm is how the CellPipe 7130 RG selects packets for QoS. Click the Remove icon to delete an existing queue. Note that subsequent rules move up by one when you take this action. Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the CellPipe 7130 RG. CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 223 Chapter 16 Quality of Service (QoS) 16.4.1 Adding a QoS Queue Click the Add button or the edit icon in the Queue Setup screen to configure a queue. Figure 89 QoS Queue Setup: Add The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 70 QoS Queue Setup: Add LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select to enable or disable this queue. Name Enter a descriptive name of up to 15 printable English keyboard characters, including spaces. Interface Select the interface to which this queue is applied. Priority Select the priority level (from 1 to 4) of this queue. The smaller the number, the higher the priority level. Traffic assigned to higher priority queues gets through faster while traffic in lower priority queues is dropped if the network is congested. Weight Select the weight (from 1 to 8) of this queue. If two queues have the same priority level, the CellPipe 7130 RG divides the bandwidth across the queues according to their weights. Queues with larger weights get more bandwidth than queues with smaller weights. 224 Buffer Management This field displays Drop Tail (DT). Drop Tail (DT) is a simple queue management algorithm that allows the CellPipe 7130 RG buffer to accept as many packets as it can until it is full. Once the buffer is full, new packets that arrive are dropped until there is space in the buffer again (packets are transmitted out of it). Scheduler Algorithm As of writing, this is set to PQWFQ by default. This stands for Priority Queue Weighted Fair Queuing, which is a packet-based scheduling algorithm that allocates more bandwidth to critical applications. CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide Chapter 16 Quality of Service (QoS) Table 70 QoS Queue Setup: Add LABEL DESCRIPTION Rate Limit Specify the maximum transmission rate (in Kbps) allowed for traffic on this queue. Back Click Back to return to the previous screen without saving. Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the CellPipe 7130 RG. Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh. 16.5 The Class Setup Screen Use this screen to add, edit or delete QoS classifiers. A classifier groups traffic into data flows according to specific criteria such as the source address, destination address, source port number, destination port number or incoming interface. For example, you can configure a classifier to select traffic from the same protocol port (such as Telnet) to form a flow. You can give different priorities to traffic that the CellPipe 7130 RG forwards out through the WAN interface. Give high priority to voice and video to make them run more smoothly. Similarly, give low priority to many large file downloads so that they do not reduce the quality of other applications. Click QoS > Class Setup to open the following screen. Figure 90 QoS Class Setup The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 71 QoS Class Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Add Click this button to create a new classifier. Order This field displays the index number of the classifier. Active Select the check box to enable the classifier. Class Name This is the name of the classifier. CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 225 Chapter 16 Quality of Service (QoS) Table 71 QoS Class Setup (continued) LABEL DESCRIPTION Classification Criteria This shows criteria specified in this classifier, for example the interface from which traffic of this class should come and the source MAC address of traffic that matches this classifier. Forward To This is the interface through which traffic that matches this classifier is forwarded out. DSCP Mark This is the DSCP number added to traffic of this classifier. 802.1P Mark This is the IEEE 802.1p priority level assigned to traffic of this classifier. VLAN ID Tag This is the VLAN ID number assigned to traffic of this classifier. To Queue This is the name of the queue in which traffic of this classifier is put. Modify Click the Edit icon to go to the screen where you can edit the classifier. Click the Remove icon to delete an existing classifier. Note that subsequent rules move up by one when you take this action. Apply 226 Click Apply to save your changes back to the CellPipe 7130 RG. CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide Chapter 16 Quality of Service (QoS) 16.5.1 QoS Class Edit Click the Add button or the Edit icon in the Class Setup screen to configure a classifier. Figure 91 QoS Class Setup: Add CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 227 Chapter 16 Quality of Service (QoS) The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 72 QoS Class Configuration LABEL DESCRIPTION Class Configuration Active Select to enable or disable this classifier. Class Name Enter a descriptive name of up to 15 printable English keyboard characters, including spaces. Classification Order Select an existing number to set the classifier’s order. The order takes effect after clicking Apply and can be viewed in QoS > Class Setup. Select Last to put this rule in the end of the classifier list. Forward to Interface Select a WAN interface through which traffic of this class will be forwarded out. If you select Unchange, the CellPipe 7130 RG forward traffic of this class according to the default routing table. DSCP Mark This field is available only when you select the Ether Type check box. If you select Mark, enter a DSCP value with which the CellPipe 7130 RG replaces the DSCP field in the packets. If you select Unchange, the CellPipe 7130 RG keep the DSCP field in the packets. 802.1p Mark Select a priority level with which the CellPipe 7130 RG replaces the IEEE 802.1p priority field in the packets. If you select Unchange, the CellPipe 7130 RG keep the 802.1p priority field in the packets. VLAN ID Tag If you select Remark, enter a VLAN ID number (between 1 and 4095) with which the CellPipe 7130 RG replaces the VLAN ID of the frames. If you select Remove, the CellPipe 7130 RG deletes the VLAN ID of the frames before forwarding them out. If you select Add, the CellPipe 7130 RG treat all matched traffic untagged and add a second VLAN ID. If you select Unchange, the CellPipe 7130 RG keep the VLAN ID in the packets. To Queue Select a queue that applies to this class. You should have configured a queue in the Queue Setup screen already. Criteria Configuration Use the following fields to configure the criteria for traffic classification. Basic From Interface 228 Select from which Ethernet port or wireless interface traffic of this class should come. CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide Chapter 16 Quality of Service (QoS) Table 72 QoS Class Configuration (continued) LABEL DESCRIPTION Ether Type Select a predefined application to configure a class for the matched traffic. If you select IP, you also need to configure source or destination MAC address, IP address, DHCP options, DSCP value or the protocol type. If you select 8021Q, you can configure an 802.1p priority level and VLAN ID in the Others section. Source MAC Address Select the check box and enter the source MAC address of the packet. MAC Mask Type the mask for the specified MAC address to determine which bits a packet’s MAC address should match. Enter “f” for each bit of the specified source MAC address that the traffic’s MAC address should match. Enter “0“ for the bit(s) of the matched traffic’s MAC address, which can be of any hexadecimal character(s). For example, if you set the MAC address to 00:13:49:00:00:00 and the mask to ff:ff:ff:00:00:00, a packet with a MAC address of 00:13:49:12:34:56 matches this criteria. IP Address Select the check box and enter the source IP address in dotted decimal notation. A blank source IP address means any source IP address. IP Subnet Mask Enter the source subnet mask. TCP/UDP Port Range If you select TCP or UDP in the IP Protocol field, select the check box and enter the port number(s) of the source. Exclude Select this option to exclude the packets that match the specified criteria from this classifier. Destination MAC Address Select the check box and enter the destination MAC address of the packet. MAC Mask Type the mask for the specified MAC address to determine which bits a packet’s MAC address should match. Enter “f” for each bit of the specified source MAC address that the traffic’s MAC address should match. Enter “0“ for the bit(s) of the matched traffic’s MAC address, which can be of any hexadecimal character(s). For example, if you set the MAC address to 00:13:49:00:00:00 and the mask to ff:ff:ff:00:00:00, a packet with a MAC address of 00:13:49:12:34:56 matches this criteria. IP Address Select the check box and enter the destination IP address in dotted decimal notation. A blank source IP address means any source IP address. IP Subnet Mask Enter the destination subnet mask. TCP/UDP Port Range If you select TCP or UDP in the IP Protocol field, select the check box and enter the port number(s) of the source. Exclude Select this option to exclude the packets that match the specified criteria from this classifier. Others CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 229 Chapter 16 Quality of Service (QoS) Table 72 QoS Class Configuration (continued) LABEL 802.1P DESCRIPTION This field is available only when you select 802.1Q in the Ether Type field. Select this option and select a priority level (between 0 and 7) from the drop down list box. "0" is the lowest priority level and "7" is the highest. VLAN ID This field is available only when you select 802.1Q in the Ether Type field. Select this option and specify a VLAN ID number between 1 and 4095. IP Protocol This field is available only when you select IP in the Ether Type field. Select this option and select the protocol (service type) from TCP, UDP, ICMP or IGMP. If you select User defined, enter the protocol (service type) number. IP Packet Length DSCP This field is available only when you select IP in the Ether Type field. Select this option and enter the minimum and maximum packet length (from 28 to 1500) in the fields provided. This field is available only when you select IP in the Ether Type field. Select this option and specify a DSCP (DiffServ Code Point) number between 0 and 63 in the field provided. TCP ACK This field is available only when you select IP in the Ether Type field. If you select this option, the matched TCP packets must contain the ACK (Acknowledge) flag. DHCP This field is available only when you select IP in the Ether Type field. Select this option and select a DHCP option. If you select Vendor Class ID (DHCP Option 60), enter the Vendor Class Identifier (Option 60) of the matched traffic, such as the type of the hardware or firmware. If you select User Class ID (DHCP Option 77), enter a string that identifies the user’s category or application type in the matched DHCP packets. Exclude 230 Select this option to exclude the packets that match the specified criteria from this classifier. Back Click Back to return to the previous screen without saving. Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the CellPipe 7130 RG. Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh. CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide Chapter 16 Quality of Service (QoS) 16.6 The Policer Setup Screen Click QoS > Policer Setup to open the following screen. The CellPipe 7130 RG can control ingress (or incoming) traffic by dropping packets that exceed the committed rate and/or committed burst size specified in this screen. A policer is a QoS policy. Figure 92 Policer Setup The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 73 Policer Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Add Click this button to create a new policy. No This field displays the index number of the policy. Active Select the check box to enable the policy. Name This is the name of the policy. Regulated Classes This shows to which classes the policy applies. Meter Type This is set to Simple Token Bucket, which is similar to tokens in a bucket to control when traffic can be transmitted. The bucket is a buffer that temporarily stores outgoing packets and transmits them at an average rate. Committed Rate This shows the maximum committed rate for the specified class/es. Committed Burst Size This shows the maximum committed burst size for the specified class/ es. Modify Click the Edit icon to go to the screen where you can edit the classifier. Click the Remove icon to delete an existing classifier. Note that subsequent rules move up by one when you take this action. Apply CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide Click Apply to save your changes back to the CellPipe 7130 RG. 231 Chapter 16 Quality of Service (QoS) 16.6.1 Policer Setup Edit Click the Add button or the Edit icon in the Policer Setup screen to configure a classifier. Figure 93 Add/Edit Policer Setup The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 74 Add/Edit Policer Setup 232 LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select the check box to enable the policy. Name Enter a descriptive name of up to 15 printable English keyboard characters, including spaces. Meter Type This is set to Simple Token Bucket, which uses tokens in a bucket to control when traffic can be transmitted. The bucket is a buffer that temporarily stores outgoing packets and transmits them at an average rate. Committed Rate Enter the maximum committed rate for the class/es. Committed Burst Size Enter the the maximum committed burst size for the class/es. Available Class This shows all the classes created in the CellPipe 7130 RG. Select the class that you want to include in the policy and click Add to move it to selected class. Selected Class This shows to which classes the policy applies. Select the class that you want to exclude from the policy and click Remove to move it to the available class. Add/Remove Use these buttons to add or remove a class from either Available Class and Selected Class boxes. CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide Chapter 16 Quality of Service (QoS) Table 74 Add/Edit Policer Setup (continued) LABEL DESCRIPTION Back Click Back to return to the previous screen without saving. Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the CellPipe 7130 RG. Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh. 16.7 The QoS Monitor Screen To view the CellPipe 7130 RG’s QoS packet statistics, click Advanced > QoS > Monitor. The screen appears as shown. Figure 94 QoS > Monitor The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 75 QoS > Monitor LABEL DESCRIPTION Monitor Refresh Interval Enter how often you want the CellPipe 7130 RG to update this screen. Select No Refresh to stop refreshing statistics. Queue Monitor No. This is the index number of the entry. Name This shows the name of the queue. Pass Rate This shows how many packets assigned to this queue are transmitted successfully. Drop Rate This shows how many packets assigned to this queue are dropped. 16.8 Technical Reference The following section contains additional technical information about the CellPipe 7130 RG features described in this chapter. CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 233 Chapter 16 Quality of Service (QoS) IEEE 802.1Q Tag The IEEE 802.1Q standard defines an explicit VLAN tag in the MAC header to identify the VLAN membership of a frame across bridges. A VLAN tag includes the 12-bit VLAN ID and 3-bit user priority. The VLAN ID associates a frame with a specific VLAN and provides the information that devices need to process the frame across the network. IEEE 802.1p specifies the user priority field and defines up to eight separate traffic types. The following table describes the traffic types defined in the IEEE 802.1d standard (which incorporates the 802.1p). Table 76 IEEE 802.1p Priority Level and Traffic Type PRIORITY LEVEL TRAFFIC TYPE Level 7 Typically used for network control traffic such as router configuration messages. Level 6 Typically used for voice traffic that is especially sensitive to jitter (jitter is the variations in delay). Level 5 Typically used for video that consumes high bandwidth and is sensitive to jitter. Level 4 Typically used for controlled load, latency-sensitive traffic such as SNA (Systems Network Architecture) transactions. Level 3 Typically used for “excellent effort” or better than best effort and would include important business traffic that can tolerate some delay. Level 2 This is for “spare bandwidth”. Level 1 This is typically used for non-critical “background” traffic such as bulk transfers that are allowed but that should not affect other applications and users. Level 0 Typically used for best-effort traffic. DiffServ QoS is used to prioritize source-to-destination traffic flows. All packets in the flow are given the same priority. You can use CoS (class of service) to give different priorities to different packet types. DiffServ (Differentiated Services) is a class of service (CoS) model that marks packets so that they receive specific per-hop treatment at DiffServ-compliant network devices along the route based on the application types and traffic flow. Packets are marked with DiffServ Code Points (DSCPs) indicating the level of service desired. This allows the intermediary DiffServ-compliant network devices to handle the packets differently depending on the code points without the need to negotiate paths or remember state information for every flow. In addition, applications do not have to request a particular service or give advanced notice of where the traffic is going. 234 CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide Chapter 16 Quality of Service (QoS) DSCP and Per-Hop Behavior DiffServ defines a new Differentiated Services (DS) field to replace the Type of Service (TOS) field in the IP header. The DS field contains a 2-bit unused field and a 6-bit DSCP field which can define up to 64 service levels. The following figure illustrates the DS field. DSCP is backward compatible with the three precedence bits in the ToS octet so that non-DiffServ compliant, ToS-enabled network device will not conflict with the DSCP mapping. DSCP (6 bits) Unused (2 bits) The DSCP value determines the forwarding behavior, the PHB (Per-Hop Behavior), that each packet gets across the DiffServ network. Based on the marking rule, different kinds of traffic can be marked for different kinds of forwarding. Resources can then be allocated according to the DSCP values and the configured policies. CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 235 Chapter 16 Quality of Service (QoS) 236 CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide CHAPTER 17 Dynamic DNS Setup 17.1 Overview Dynamic DNS allows you to update your current dynamic IP address with one or many dynamic DNS services so that anyone can contact you (in NetMeeting, CUSeeMe, etc.). You can also access your FTP server or Web site on your own computer using a domain name (for instance myhost.dhs.org, where myhost is a name of your choice) that will never change instead of using an IP address that changes each time you reconnect. Your friends or relatives will always be able to call you even if they don't know your IP address. First of all, you need to have registered a dynamic DNS account with www.dyndns.org. This is for people with a dynamic IP from their ISP or DHCP server that would still like to have a domain name. The Dynamic DNS service provider will give you a password or key. 17.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter Use the Dynamic DNS screen (Section 17.3 on page 238) to enable DDNS and configure the DDNS settings on the CellPipe 7130 RG. 17.2 What You Need To Know DYNDNS Wildcard Enabling the wildcard feature for your host causes *.yourhost.dyndns.org to be aliased to the same IP address as yourhost.dyndns.org. This feature is useful if you want to be able to use, for example, www.yourhost.dyndns.org and still reach your hostname. If you have a private WAN IP address, then you cannot use Dynamic DNS. CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 237 Chapter 17 Dynamic DNS Setup 17.3 The Dynamic DNS Screen To change your CellPipe 7130 RG’s DDNS, click Advanced > Dynamic DNS. The screen appears as shown. Figure 95 Advanced > Dynamic DNS The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 77 Advanced > Dynamic DNS LABEL DESCRIPTION Service Provider Select the name of your Dynamic DNS service provider. Host Name Type the domain name assigned to your CellPipe 7130 RG by your Dynamic DNS provider. You can specify up to two host names in the field separated by a comma (","). 238 Interface Select the WAN interface to use for updating the IP address of the domain name. User Name Type your user name. Password Type the password assigned to you. Email If you select TZO in the Service Provider field, enter the user name you used to register for this service. Key If you select TZO in the Service Provider field, enter the password you used to register for this service. Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the CellPipe 7130 RG. Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh. CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide CHAPTER 18 Remote Management 18.1 Overview This chapter explains how to configure the remote management and access control settings on the CellPipe 7130 RG. The CellPipe 7130 RG supports multiple remote management sessions running at one time. Note: Refer to Section 3.2 on page 83 for user level information. Each user level has its own account information for logging into the CellPipe 7130 RG. 18.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter • The TR-069 screen lets you configure the CellPipe 7130 RG’s TR-069 autoconfiguration settings (Section 18.3 on page 241). • The TR-064 screen lets you enable management via TR-064 on the CellPipe 7130 RG (Section 18.3 on page 241). • The Service Control screens let you configure through which interface(s) users can use which service(s) to manage the CellPipe 7130 RG (Section 18.4 on page 242). • The IP Address screens let you configure from which IP address(es) users can use a service to manage the CellPipe 7130 RG (Section 18.5 on page 243). 18.2 The TR-069 Screen TR-069 defines how Customer Premise Equipment (CPE), for example your CellPipe 7130 RG, can be managed over the WAN by an Auto Configuration Server (ACS). TR-069 is based on sending Remote Procedure Calls (RPCs) between an ACS and a client device. RPCs are sent in Extensible Markup Language (XML) format over HTTP or HTTPS. An administrator can use an ACS to remotely set up the CellPipe 7130 RG, modify settings, perform firmware upgrades as well as monitor and diagnose the CellPipe CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 239 Chapter 18 Remote Management 7130 RG. You have to enable the device to be managed by the ACS and specify the ACS IP address or domain name and username and password. Click Advanced > Remote MGMT to open the following screen. Use this screen to configure your CellPipe 7130 RG to be managed by an ACS. Figure 96 TR-069 The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 78 TR-069 240 LABEL DESCRIPTION Inform Select Enable to activate remote management via TR-069 on the WAN. Otherwise, select Disable. Inform Interval Enter the time interval (in seconds) at which the CellPipe 7130 RG sends information to the auto-configuration server. ACS URL Enter the URL or IP address of the auto-configuration server. ACS User Name Enter the TR-069 user name for authentication with the autoconfiguration server. ACS Password Enter the TR-069 password for authentication with the autoconfiguration server. WAN Interface used by TR-069 client Select a WAN interface through which the TR-069 traffic passes. Display SOAP messages on serial console Select Enable to show the SOAP messages on the console. Connection Request Authentication Select this option to enable authentication when there is a connection request from the ACS. If you select Multi_WAN, you should also select the pre-configured WAN connection(s). CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide Chapter 18 Remote Management Table 78 TR-069 (continued) LABEL DESCRIPTION Connection Request User Name Enter the connection request user name. Connection Request Password Enter the connection request password. Connection Request URL This shows the connection request URL. Apply Click this button to save your changes back to the CellPipe 7130 RG. Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh. When the ACS makes a connection request to the CellPipe 7130 RG, this user name is used to authenticate the ACS. When the ACS makes a connection request to the CellPipe 7130 RG, this password is used to authenticate the ACS. The ACS can use this URL to make a connection request to the CellPipe 7130 RG. 18.3 The TR-064 Screen TR-064 is a LAN-Side DSL CPE Configuration protocol defined by the DSL Forum. TR-064 is built on top of UPnP. It allows the users to use a TR-064 compliant CPE management application on their computers from the LAN to discover the CPE and configure user-specific parameters, such as the username and password. Click Advanced > Remote MGMT > TR064 to open the following screen. Figure 97 TR-064 The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 79 TR-064 LABEL DESCRIPTION Enanble TR064 Select the check box to activate management via TR-064 on the LAN. Apply Click this button to save your changes back to the CellPipe 7130 RG. CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 241 Chapter 18 Remote Management 18.4 The Service Control Screen Click Advanced > Remote MGMT > Service Control to open the following screen. Use this screen to decide what services you may use to access which CellPipe 7130 RG interface. Figure 98 Service Control The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 80 Access Control: Services 242 LABEL DESCRIPTION Service Control Select Enable to turn on service control. Otherwise, select Disable. This is the index number of the entry. Services This is the service you may use to access the CellPipe 7130 RG. LAN Select the Enable check box for the corresponding services that you want to allow access to the CellPipe 7130 RG from the LAN. WAN Select the Enable check box for the corresponding services that you want to allow access to the CellPipe 7130 RG from the WAN. Apply Click this button to save your changes back to the CellPipe 7130 RG. CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide Chapter 18 Remote Management 18.5 The IP Address Screen Click Advanced > Remote MGMT > IP Address to open the following screen. Use this screen to specify the “trusted” computers from which an administrator may use a service to manage the CellPipe 7130 RG. Figure 99 IP Address The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 81 IP Address LABEL DESCRIPTION Access Control Mode Select Enable to activate the secured client list. Select Disable to disable the list without deleting it. IP Address This is the IP address of the trusted computer from which you can manage the CellPipe 7130 RG. Remove Select this check box and click the Remove button to delete this entry from the CellPipe 7130 RG. Add Click this button to create a new entry. Remove Click this button to delete the selected entry. CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 243 Chapter 18 Remote Management 18.5.1 Adding an IP Address Click the Add button in the IP Address screen to open the following screen. Figure 100 IP Address: Add The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 82 IP Address: Add 244 LABEL DESCRIPTION IP Address Enter the IP address of the trusted computer from which you can manage the CellPipe 7130 RG. Apply/Save Click this button to save your changes back to the CellPipe 7130 RG. Back Click this button to return to the previous screen without saving. CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide CHAPTER 19 Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP) 19.1 Overview Universal Plug and Play (UPnP) is a distributed, open networking standard that uses TCP/IP for simple peer-to-peer network connectivity between devices. A UPnP device can dynamically join a network, obtain an IP address, convey its capabilities and learn about other devices on the network. In turn, a device can leave a network smoothly and automatically when it is no longer in use. 19.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter The UPnP screen lets you enable UPnP on the CellPipe 7130 RG (Section 19.3 on page 246). 19.2 What You Need to Know How do I know if I'm using UPnP? UPnP hardware is identified as an icon in the Network Connections folder (Windows XP). Each UPnP compatible device installed on your network will appear as a separate icon. Selecting the icon of a UPnP device will allow you to access the information and properties of that device. NAT Traversal UPnP NAT traversal automates the process of allowing an application to operate through NAT. UPnP network devices can automatically configure network addressing, announce their presence in the network to other UPnP devices and enable exchange of simple product and service descriptions. NAT traversal allows the following: • Dynamic port mapping • Learning public IP addresses • Assigning lease times to mappings CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 245 Chapter 19 Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP) Windows Messenger is an example of an application that supports NAT traversal and UPnP. See the NAT chapter for more information on NAT. Cautions with UPnP The automated nature of NAT traversal applications in establishing their own services and opening firewall ports may present network security issues. Network information and configuration may also be obtained and modified by users in some network environments. When a UPnP device joins a network, it announces its presence with a multicast message. For security reasons, the CellPipe 7130 RG allows multicast messages on the LAN only. All UPnP-enabled devices may communicate freely with each other without additional configuration. Disable UPnP if this is not your intention. UPnP and CellPipe 7130 RG This device has achieved UPnP certification from the Universal Plug and Play Forum UPnP™ Implementers Corp. (UIC). The UPnP implementation supports Internet Gateway Device (IGD) 1.0. See the following sections for examples of installing and using UPnP. 19.3 The UPnP Screen Click Advanced > UPnP to display the screen shown next. See Section 19.1 on page 245 for more information. Figure 101 Advanced > UPnP 246 CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide Chapter 19 Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP) The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 83 Advanced > UPnP LABEL DESCRIPTION Activate Universal Plug and Play (UPnP) Feature Select this check box to enable UPnP. Be aware that anyone could use a UPnP application to open the web configurator's login screen without entering the CellPipe 7130 RG's IP address (although you must still enter the password to access the web configurator). Apply/Save Click this to save the setting to the CellPipe 7130 RG. 19.4 Installing UPnP in Windows Example This section shows how to install UPnP in Windows Me and Windows XP. Installing UPnP in Windows Me Follow the steps below to install the UPnP in Windows Me. Click Start and Control Panel. Double-click Add/Remove Programs. Click on the Windows Setup tab and select Communication in the Components selection box. Click Details. Figure 102 Add/Remove Programs: Windows Setup: Communication CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 247 Chapter 19 Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP) In the Communications window, select the Universal Plug and Play check box in the Components selection box. Figure 103 Add/Remove Programs: Windows Setup: Communication: Components Click OK to go back to the Add/Remove Programs Properties window and click Next. Restart the computer when prompted. Installing UPnP in Windows XP Follow the steps below to install the UPnP in Windows XP. 248 Click Start and Control Panel. Double-click Network Connections. CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide Chapter 19 Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP) In the Network Connections window, click Advanced in the main menu and select Optional Networking Components …. Figure 104 Network Connections The Windows Optional Networking Components Wizard window displays. Select Networking Service in the Components selection box and click Details. Figure 105 Windows Optional Networking Components Wizard CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 249 Chapter 19 Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP) In the Networking Services window, select the Universal Plug and Play check box. Figure 106 Networking Services Click OK to go back to the Windows Optional Networking Component Wizard window and click Next. 19.5 Using UPnP in Windows XP Example This section shows you how to use the UPnP feature in Windows XP. You must already have UPnP installed in Windows XP and UPnP activated on the CellPipe 7130 RG. Make sure the computer is connected to a LAN port of the CellPipe 7130 RG. Turn on your computer and the CellPipe 7130 RG. Auto-discover Your UPnP-enabled Network Device 250 Click Start and Control Panel. Double-click Network Connections. An icon displays under Internet Gateway. CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide Chapter 19 Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP) Right-click the icon and select Properties. Figure 107 Network Connections In the Internet Connection Properties window, click Settings to see the port mappings there were automatically created. Figure 108 Internet Connection Properties CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 251 Chapter 19 Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP) You may edit or delete the port mappings or click Add to manually add port mappings. Figure 109 Internet Connection Properties: Advanced Settings Figure 110 Internet Connection Properties: Advanced Settings: Add 252 When the UPnP-enabled device is disconnected from your computer, all port mappings will be deleted automatically. CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide Chapter 19 Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP) Select Show icon in notification area when connected option and click OK. An icon displays in the system tray. Figure 111 System Tray Icon Double-click on the icon to display your current Internet connection status. Figure 112 Internet Connection Status Web Configurator Easy Access With UPnP, you can access the web-based configurator on the CellPipe 7130 RG without finding out the IP address of the CellPipe 7130 RG first. This comes helpful if you do not know the IP address of the CellPipe 7130 RG. Follow the steps below to access the web configurator. Click Start and then Control Panel. Double-click Network Connections. CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 253 Chapter 19 Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP) Select My Network Places under Other Places. Figure 113 Network Connections 254 An icon with the description for each UPnP-enabled device displays under Local Network. CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide Chapter 19 Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP) Right-click on the icon for your CellPipe 7130 RG and select Invoke. The web configurator login screen displays. Figure 114 Network Connections: My Network Places Right-click on the icon for your CellPipe 7130 RG and select Properties. A properties window displays with basic information about the CellPipe 7130 RG. Figure 115 Network Connections: My Network Places: Properties: Example CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 255 Chapter 19 Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP) 256 CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide CHAPTER 20 Parental Control 20.1 Overview Parental control allows you to block web sites with the specific URL. You can also define time periods and days during which the CellPipe 7130 RG performs parental control on a specific user. 20.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter • The Time Restriction screen lets you give different time restrictions to each user of your network (Section 20.2 on page 257). • The Content Filter screen lets you restrict home network users from viewing inappropriate websites (Section 20.3 on page 259). 20.2 The Time Restriction Screen Use this screen to view the schedules and enable parental control on a specific user during certain periods. Click Advanced Setup > Parental Control to open the following screen. Figure 116 Parental Control > Time restriction CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 257 Chapter 20 Parental Control The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 84 Parental Control > Time Restriction LABEL DESCRIPTION This shows the index number of the schedule. Active Select the check box to enable the schedule. username This shows the name of the user. MAC This shows the MAC address of the LAN user’s computer to which this schedule applies. Mon ~ Sun x indicates the day(s) on which parental control is enabled. Start This shows the time when the schedule starts. Stop This shows the time when the schedule ends. Modify Click the Edit icon to go to the screen where you can edit the schedule. Click the Remove icon to delete an existing schedule. Add Click Add to create a new schedule. Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the CellPipe 7130 RG. 20.2.1 Adding a Schedule Click the Add button in the Time Restriction screen to open the following screen. Use this screen to configure a restricted access schedule for a specific user on your network. Figure 117 Time Restriction Configuration 258 CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide Chapter 20 Parental Control The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 85 Time Restriction Configuration LABEL DESCRIPTION User Name Enter the name of the user. MAC Address Enter the MAC address of the LAN user’s computer to which this schedule applies. Days of the week Select check boxes for the days that you want the CellPipe 7130 RG to perform parental control. Start Blocking Time End Blocking Time Enter the time period of each day, in 24-hour format, during which parental control will be enforced. Back Click this button to return to the previous screen without saving any changes. Save/Apply Click this button to save your settings back to the CellPipe 7130 RG. 20.3 The Content Filter Screen Use this screen to configure filtering settings to block the users on your network from accessing certain web sites. Click Advanced Setup > Parental Control > Content Filter to open the following screen. Figure 118 Parental Control > Content Filter CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 259 Chapter 20 Parental Control The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 86 Parental Control >Content Filter LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Filter Select the check box to enable URL filtering on the CellPipe 7130 RG. Blocking list The table shows the keywords contained in the URL that the CellPipe 7130 RG prohibits the users from viewing. It also shows through which port the keyword is blocked. This is the index number of the rule. Active Select the check box to enable the filtering rule. Keyword This is the keyword that is blocked in this rule. Port This is the port number the web server uses to forward HTTP traffic. Modify Click the Edit icon to go to the screen where you can edit the rule. Click the Remove icon to delete an existing rule. Add Click Add to create a new rule. Apply Click this button to save your settings back to the CellPipe 7130 RG. 20.3.1 Adding Filter Rule Click the Add button in the URL Filter screen to open the following screen. Figure 119 URL Filter Configuration The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 87 URL Filter Configuration 260 LABEL DESCRIPTION Keyword Enter the keyword that the CellPipe 7130 RG blocks. Port Number Specify the port number the web server uses to forward HTTP traffic. Back Click this button to return to the previous screen without saving any changes. Save/Apply Click this button to save your settings back to the CellPipe 7130 RG. CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide CHAPTER 21 IGMP 21.1 Overview This chapter discusses the IGMP screens. Traditionally, IP packets are transmitted in one of either two ways - Unicast (1 sender to 1 recipient) or Broadcast (1 sender to everybody on the network). Multicast delivers IP packets to just a group of hosts on the network. IGMP (Internet Group Multicast Protocol) is a network-layer protocol used to establish membership in a multicast group - it is not used to carry user data. See RFC 1112 and RFC 2236 for information on IGMP versions 1 and 2, respectively. 21.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter • The IGMP screen lets you select the IGMP version to use as well as configure the settings for IGMP (Section 21.2 on page 263). • The IGMP Source Configuration screen lets you set the server where the CellPipe 7130 RG gets the multicast group information (Section 21.2 on page 263). 21.1.2 What You Need to Know IP Multicast Addresses In IPv4, a multicast address allows a device to send packets to a specific group of hosts (multicast group) in a different sub-network. A multicast IP address represents a traffic receiving group, not individual receiving devices. IP addresses in the Class D range (224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255) are used for IP multicasting. Certain IP multicast numbers are reserved by IANA for special purposes (see the IANA web site for more information). IGMP Snooping A layer-2 switch can passively snoop on IGMP Query, Report and Leave (IGMP version 2) packets transferred between IP multicast routers/switches and IP multicast hosts to learn the IP multicast group membership. It checks IGMP CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 261 Chapter 21 IGMP packets passing through it, picks out the group registration information, and configures multicasting accordingly. IGMP snooping allows the CellPipe 7130 RG to learn multicast groups without you having to manually configure them. The CellPipe 7130 RG forwards multicast traffic destined for multicast groups (that it has learned from IGMP snooping or that you have manually configured) to ports that are members of that group. The CellPipe 7130 RG discards multicast traffic destined for multicast groups that it does not know. IGMP snooping generates no additional network traffic, allowing you to significantly reduce multicast traffic passing through your device. IGMP Proxy To allow better network performance, you can use IGMP proxy instead of a multicast routing protocol in a simple tree network topology. Note: Your CellPipe 7130 RG is an IGMP proxy. In IGMP proxy, an upstream interface is the port that is closer to the source (or the root of the multicast tree) and is able to receive multicast traffic. There should only be one upstream interface (also known as the query port) for one query VLAN on the CellPipe 7130 RG. A downstream interface is a port that connects to a host (such as a computer). 262 CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide Chapter 21 IGMP The following figure shows a network example where A is the multicast source while computers 1, 2 and 3 are the receivers. In the figure A is connected to the upstream interface and 1, 2 and 3 are connected to the downstream interface. Figure 120 IGMP Proxy Network Example Multicast Server Proxy Hosts The CellPipe 7130 RG will not respond to IGMP join and leave messages on the upstream interface. The CellPipe 7130 RG only responds to IGMP query messages on the upstream interface. The CellPipe 7130 RG sends IGMP query messages to the hosts that are members of the query VLAN. The CellPipe 7130 RG only sends an IGMP leave message via the upstream interface when the last host leaves a multicast group. 21.2 The IGMP Screen Use this screen to select the IGMP version to use as well as configure the settings for IGMP. CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 263 Chapter 21 IGMP Click Advanced Setup > IGMP to open the following screen. Figure 121 IGMP The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 88 IGMP LABEL DESCRIPTION Version There are three versions of IGMP. IGMP version 2 and 3 are improvements over version 1, but IGMP version 1 is still in wide use. IGMP version 3 supports source filtering, reporting or ignoring traffic from specific source address to a particular host on the network. If you would like to read more detailed information about interoperability between IGMP version 2 and version 1, please see sections 4 and 5 of RFC 2236. Select the IGMP version that you would like the CellPipe 7130 RG to use. 264 Query Interval Specify how many seconds since the last query the CellPipe 7130 RG waits before it queries all directly connected networks to gather multicast group membership. Query Response Time Specify how many seconds the host allots for gathering membership information from directly connected networks before it sends a report. Last Member Query Response Time Specify how many seconds the host allots for gathering membership information from a specific IP address before it sends a report. Robustness Value This is the number of times the host sends a report to the CellPipe 7130 RG when the CellPipe 7130 RG queries for the host’s status. Maximum Multicast Groups Enter the number of multicast groups that the CellPipe 7130 RG is allowed to join. Maximum Multicast Data Sources (for IGMPv3) This is the maximum number of multicast servers that the host can handle. CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide Chapter 21 IGMP Table 88 IGMP (continued) LABEL DESCRIPTION Maximum Multicast Group Members This is the maximum number of members allowed for a multicast group. Fast Leave Enable Enable this to have the host stop sending multicast messages to an IP address that has left the multicast group or a multicast group with no members. Apply Click this button to save your settings back to the CellPipe 7130 RG. 21.3 Interface Source Configuration Use this screen to configure the server where the CellPipe 7130 RG gets the multicast group information. Click Advanced > IGMP Source Configuration to open the following screen. Figure 122 IGMP Source Configuration The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 89 IGMP Source Configuration LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Source List Check this to stop having the CellPipe 7130 RG act as an IGMP proxy. This is the index number of the server. Active Enable this to use the server as the IGMP source configuration. Address This is the IP address of the server that has the multicast group membership information that the host will use. Modify Click the Edit icon to change the entry. Deselect this to have the CellPipe 7130 RG act as an IGMP proxy and then create the IP address(es) of the actual IGMP multicast servers. Click the Delete icon to delete the entry, CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 265 Chapter 21 IGMP Table 89 IGMP Source Configuration (continued) LABEL DESCRIPTION Add Click this button to create a new rule. Apply Click this button to save your settings back to the CellPipe 7130 RG. 21.3.1 Add/Edit IGMP Source Click the Add button or Edit icon in the IGMP Source Configuration screen to open the following. Use this screen to add or edit an IGMP source entry. Figure 123 Interface Grouping Criteria The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 90 Interface Grouping Criteria 266 LABEL DESCRIPTION Active This shows whether the entry is active or not. Address Enter the IP address of the server that has the multicast grouping information that the host will use. Back Click this button to return to the previous screen without saving any changes. Apply Click this button to save your settings back to the CellPipe 7130 RG. CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide CHAPTER 22 System Settings 22.1 Overview This chapter shows you how to configure system related settings, such as system time, password, name, the domain name and the inactivity timeout interval. 22.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter • The General screen lets you configure system settings (Section 22.2 on page 267). • The Time Setting screen lets you set the system time (Section 22.3 on page 269). 22.2 The General Screen Use the General screen to configure system settings such as the system password. Click Maintenance > System to open the General screen. Figure 124 Maintenance > System > General CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 267 Chapter 22 System Settings The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 91 Maintenance > System > Genera LABEL DESCRIPTION UserName/ Password UserName Type the user name you use to access the system. Old Password Type the default password or the existing password you use to access the system in this field. New Password Type your new system password (up to 30 characters). Note that as you type a password, the screen displays a (*) for each character you type. After you change the password, use the new password to access the CellPipe 7130 RG. Retype to Confirm Type the new password again for confirmation. Web Session Timeout 268 Timeout Value (sec) Enter how many minutes of inactivity the CellPipe 7130 RG waits before automatically disconnecting a session. You need to enter the username and password again before accessing the Web Configurator. Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the CellPipe 7130 RG. Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh. CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide Chapter 22 System Settings 22.3 The Time Setting Screen To change your CellPipe 7130 RG’s time and date, click Maintenance > System > Time Setting. The screen appears as shown. Use this screen to configure the CellPipe 7130 RG’s time based on your local time zone. Figure 125 Maintenance > System > Time Setting The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 92 Maintenance > System > Time Setting LABEL DESCRIPTION Current Time Current Time This field displays the time of your CellPipe 7130 RG. Each time you reload this page, the CellPipe 7130 RG synchronizes the time with the time server. Current Date This field displays the date of your CellPipe 7130 RG. Each time you reload this page, the CellPipe 7130 RG synchronizes the date with the time server. Time and Date Setup Manual Select this option to enter the time and date manually. Get from Time Server Select this option to have the CellPipe 7130 RG get the time and date from the time server you specified below. CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 269 Chapter 22 System Settings Table 92 Maintenance > System > Time Setting (continued) LABEL DESCRIPTION First NTP time server Select an NTP time server from the drop-down list box. Second NTP time server Third NTP time server Otherwise, select Other and enter the IP address or URL (up to 20 extended ASCII characters in length) of your time server. Select None if you don’t want to configure the time server. Check with your ISP/network administrator if you are unsure of this information. Fourth NTP time server Fifth NTP time server Time zone offset Choose the time zone of your location. This will set the time difference between your time zone and Greenwich Mean Time (GMT). 270 Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the CellPipe 7130 RG. Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh. CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide CHAPTER 23 Logs 23.1 Overview This chapter contains information about configuring general log settings and viewing the CellPipe 7130 RG’s logs. The web configurator allows you to choose which categories of events and/or alerts to have the CellPipe 7130 RG log and then display the logs or have the CellPipe 7130 RG send them to a syslog server. 23.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter • The View Log screen lets you see the logs for the categories that you selected in the Log Settings screen (Section 23.2 on page 271). • The Log Settings screen lets you configure to where the CellPipe 7130 RG is to send logs and which logs and/or immediate alerts the CellPipe 7130 RG is to record (Section 23.3 on page 272). 23.2 The View Log Screen Click Maintenance > Logs to open the View Log screen. Use the View Log screen to see the logs for the categories that you selected in the Log Settings screen (see Section 23.3 on page 272). CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 271 Chapter 23 Logs The log wraps around and deletes the old entries after it fills. Figure 126 Maintenance > Logs > View Log The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 93 Maintenance > Logs > View Log LABEL DESCRIPTION Display Select a severity level of logs to view. The CellPipe 7130 RG displays the logs with the severity level equal to or higher than what you selected. This field is a sequential value and is not associated with a specific entry. Date/Time This field displays the time the log was recorded. Severity This field displays the severity level of the log. System This field displays the system module from which the logs come. Message This field states the reason for the log. 23.3 The Log Settings Screen Use the Log Settings screen to configure to where the CellPipe 7130 RG is to send logs and which logs and/or immediate alerts the CellPipe 7130 RG is to record and display. 272 CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide Chapter 23 Logs To change your CellPipe 7130 RG’s log settings, click Maintenance > Logs > Log Settings. The screen appears as shown. Figure 127 Maintenance > Logs > Log Settings The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 94 Maintenance > Logs > Log Settings LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select to enable or disable system logging. Log Level Select the severity level of the logs that you want the CellPipe 7130 RG to display, record and send to the log server. The CellPipe 7130 RG displays and records the logs with the severity level equal to or higher than what you selected. Mode Select Local to record the logs and store them in the local memory of the CellPipe 7130 RG only. Select Remote to send logs to the specified log server. Select Both to record the logs and store them in the local memory and also send logs to the log server. Syslog Server IP Address Enter the server name or the IP address of the log server. Syslog Server UDP Port Enter the UDP port of the log server. Apply Click Apply to save your customized settings. CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 273 Chapter 23 Logs 274 CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide CHAPTER 24 Tools Do not interrupt the file transfer process as this may PERMANENTLY DAMAGE your CellPipe 7130 RG. 24.1 Overview This chapter explains how to upload new firmware, manage configuration files and restart your CellPipe 7130 RG. Use the instructions in this chapter to change the device’s configuration file or upgrade its firmware. After you configure your device, you can backup the configuration file to a computer. That way if you later misconfigure the device, you can upload the backed up configuration file to return to your previous settings. You can alternately upload the factory default configuration file if you want to return the device to the original default settings. The firmware determines the device’s available features and functionality. Only use firmware for your device’s specific model. Refer to the label on the bottom of your CellPipe 7130 RG. 24.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter • The Firmware screen lets you upload firmware to your device (Section 24.2 on page 276). • The Configuration screen lets you backup and restore device configurations (Section 24.3 on page 278). You can also reset your device settings back to the factory default. • The Restart screen lets you restart your CellPipe 7130 RG (Section 24.4 on page 280). CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 275 Chapter 24 Tools 24.2 The Firmware Screen Click Maintenance > Tools to open the Firmware screen. Follow the instructions in this screen to upload firmware to your CellPipe 7130 RG. The upload process uses HTTP (Hypertext Transfer Protocol) and may take up to two minutes. After a successful upload, the system will reboot. Do NOT turn off the CellPipe 7130 RG while firmware upload is in progress! Figure 128 Maintenance > Tools > Firmware The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 95 Maintenance > Tools > Firmware 276 LABEL DESCRIPTION Current Firmware Version This is the present Firmware version and the date created. File Path Type in the location of the file you want to upload in this field or click Browse ... to find it. Browse... Click Browse... to find the .bin file you want to upload. Remember that you must decompress compressed (.zip) files before you can upload them. Upload Click Upload to begin the upload process. This process may take up to two minutes. CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide Chapter 24 Tools After you see the Firmware Upload in Progress screen, wait two minutes before logging into the CellPipe 7130 RG again. Figure 129 Firmware Upload In Progress The CellPipe 7130 RG automatically restarts in this time causing a temporary network disconnect. In some operating systems, you may see the following icon on your desktop. Figure 130 Network Temporarily Disconnected After two minutes, log in again and check your new firmware version in the Status screen. If the upload was not successful, the following screen will appear. Click Tools to go back to the Firmware screen. Figure 131 Error Message CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 277 Chapter 24 Tools 24.3 The Configuration Screen Click Maintenance > Tools > Configuration. Information related to factory defaults, backup configuration, and restoring configuration appears in this screen, as shown next. Figure 132 Maintenance > Tools > Configuration Backup Configuration Backup Configuration allows you to back up (save) the CellPipe 7130 RG’s current configuration to a file on your computer. Once your CellPipe 7130 RG is configured and functioning properly, it is highly recommended that you back up your configuration file before making configuration changes. The backup configuration file will be useful in case you need to return to your previous settings. Click Backup to save the CellPipe 7130 RG’s current configuration to your computer. Restore Configuration Restore Configuration allows you to upload a new or previously saved configuration file from your computer to your CellPipe 7130 RG. Table 96 Restore Configuration 278 LABEL DESCRIPTION File Path Type in the location of the file you want to upload in this field or click Browse ... to find it. Browse... Click Browse... to find the file you want to upload. Remember that you must decompress compressed (.ZIP) files before you can upload them. Upload Click Upload to begin the upload process. CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide Chapter 24 Tools Do not turn off the CellPipe 7130 RG while configuration file upload is in progress. After you see a “restore configuration successful” screen, you must then wait one minute before logging into the CellPipe 7130 RG again. Figure 133 Configuration Upload Successful The CellPipe 7130 RG automatically restarts in this time causing a temporary network disconnect. In some operating systems, you may see the following icon on your desktop. Figure 134 Network Temporarily Disconnected If you uploaded the default configuration file you may need to change the IP address of your computer to be in the same subnet as that of the default device IP address (192.168.1.1). See Appendix B on page 321 for details on how to set up your computer’s IP address. CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 279 Chapter 24 Tools If the upload was not successful, the following screen will appear. Click Tools > Configuration to go back to the Configuration screen. Figure 135 Configuration Upload Error Reset to Factory Defaults Click the Reset button to clear all user-entered configuration information and return the CellPipe 7130 RG to its factory defaults. The following warning screen appears. Figure 136 Reset Warning Message You can also press the RESET button on the rear panel to reset the factory defaults of your CellPipe 7130 RG. Refer to Section 1.7 on page 28 for more information on the RESET button. 24.4 The Restart Screen System restart allows you to reboot the CellPipe 7130 RG without turning the power off. 280 CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide Chapter 24 Tools Click Maintenance > Tools > Restart. Click Restart to have the CellPipe 7130 RG reboot. This does not affect the CellPipe 7130 RG's configuration. Figure 137 Maintenance > Tools >Restart CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 281 Chapter 24 Tools 282 CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide CHAPTER 25 Diagnostic 25.1 Overview The Diagnostic screens display information to help you identify problems with the CellPipe 7130 RG. The route between a CO VDSL switch and one of its CPE may go through switches owned by independent organizations. A connectivity fault point generally takes time to discover and impacts subscriber’s network access. In order to eliminate the management and maintenance efforts, IEEE 802.1ag is a Connectivity Fault Management (CFM) specification which allows network administrators to identify and manage connection faults. Through discovery and verification of the path, CFM can detect, analyze and isolate connectivity faults in bridged LANs. 25.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter • The General screen lets you ping an IP address or trace the route packets take to a host (Section 25.3 on page 284). • The 802.1ag screen lets you perform CFM actions (Section 25.4 on page 285). • The OAM Ping Test screen lets you send an ATM OAM (Operation, Administration and Maintenance) packet to verify the connectivity of a specific PVC. (Section 25.4 on page 285) 25.2 What You Need to Know The following terms and concepts may help as you read through this chapter. How CFM Works A Maintenance Association (MA) defines a VLAN and associated Maintenance End Point (MEP) ports on the device under a Maintenance Domain (MD) level. An MEP port has the ability to send Connectivity Check Messages (CCMs) and get other MEP ports information from neighbor devices’ CCMs within an MA. CFM provides two tests to discover connectivity faults. CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 283 Chapter 25 Diagnostic • Loopback test - checks if the MEP port receives its Loop Back Response (LBR) from its target after it sends the Loop Back Message (LBM). If no response is received, there might be a connectivity fault between them. • Link trace test - provides additional connectivity fault analysis to get more information on where the fault is. If an MEP port does not respond to the source MEP, this may indicate a fault. Administrators can take further action to check and resume services from the fault according to the line connectivity status report. 25.3 The General Diagnostic Screen Click Maintenance > Diagnostic to open the screen shown next. Ping and traceroute help check availability of remote hosts and also help troubleshoot network or Internet connections. Figure 138 Maintenance > Diagnostic > General The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 97 Maintenance > Diagnostic > General 284 LABEL DESCRIPTION TCP/IP Address Type the IP address of a computer that you want to ping in order to test a connection or trace the route packets take to. Ping Click this button to ping the IP address that you entered. Traceoute Click this button to perform the traceroute function. This determines the path a packet takes to the specified host. CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide Chapter 25 Diagnostic 25.4 The 802.1ag Screen Click Diagnostic to open the following screen. Use this screen to perform CFM actions. Figure 139 802.1ag The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 98 Maintenance > Diagnostic > 802.1ag LABEL DESCRIPTION 802.1ag Connectivity Fault Management Maintenance Domain (MD) Name Type a name of up to 39 printable English keyboard characters for this MD. Maintenance Domain (MD) Level Select a level (0-7) under which you want to create an MA. CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide The combined length of the MD Name and MA name must be less or equal to 44bytes. 285 Chapter 25 Diagnostic Table 98 Maintenance > Diagnostic > 802.1ag (continued) LABEL DESCRIPTION Maintenance Association (MA) Name Type a name of up to 39 printable English keyboard characters for this MA. Maintenance Association (MA) Format Select the format which the CellPipe 7130 RG uses to send this MA information in the domain (MD). Options are VID, String and Integer. The combined length of the MD Name and MA name must be less or equal to 44bytes. If you select VID or Integer, the CellPipe 7130 RG adds the VLAN ID you specified for an MA in the CCM. If you select String, the CellPipe 7130 RG adds the MA name you specified above in the CCM. Note: The MEPs in the same MA shoule use the same MA format. Destination MAC Address Enter the target device’s MAC address to which the CellPipe 7130 RG performs a CFM loopback test. Count Set how many times the CellPipe 7130 RG send loopback messages (LBMs). 802.1Q VLAN ID Type a VLAN ID (0-4095) for this MA. Maintenance End Point ID Enter an ID number (1-8191) for this MEP port. Each MEP port needs a unique ID number within an MD. The MEP ID is to identify an MEP port used when you perform a CFM action Status Continuity Check Message (CCM) This shows how many Connectivity Check Messages (CCMs) are sent and if there is any invalid CCM or cross-connect CCM. Loopback Message (LBM) This shows how many Loop Back Messages (LBMs) are sent and if there is any inorder or outorder Loop Back Response (LBR) received from a remote MEP. Linktrace Message (LTM) This shows the destination MAC address in the Link Trace Response (LTR). Save Click this to save your changes back to the CellPipe 7130 RG. Enable CCM Click this button to have the selected MEP send Connectivity Check Messages (CCMs) to other MEPs. Disable CCM Click this button to disallow the selected MEP to send Connectivity Check Messages (CCMs) to other MEPs. Update CC status Click this button to reload the test result. 286 Send Loopback Click this button to have the selected MEP send the LBM (Loop Back Message) to a specified remote end point. Send Linktrace Click this button to have the selected MEP send the LTMs (Link Trace Messages) to a specified remote end point. CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide Chapter 25 Diagnostic 25.5 The OAM Ping Test Screen Click Maintenance > Diagnostic > OAM Ping Test to open the screen shown next. Use this screen to perform an OAM (Operation, Administration and Maintenance) F4 or F5 loopback test on a PVC. The CellPipe 7130 RG sends an OAM F4 or F5 packet to the DSLAM or ATM switch and then returns it to the CellPipe 7130 RG. The test result then displays in the text box. ATM sets up virtual circuits over which end systems communicate. The terminology for virtual circuits is as follows: • Virtual Channel (VC) Logical connections between ATM devices • Virtual Path (VP) A bundle of virtual channels • Virtual Circuits A series of virtual paths between circuit end points Figure 140 Virtual Circuit Topology Virtual Circuit (End-to-End) Segment ATM Switch Virtual Path Virtual Channel Think of a virtual path as a cable that contains a bundle of wires. The cable connects two points and wires within the cable provide individual circuits between the two points. In an ATM cell header, a VPI (Virtual Path Identifier) identifies a link formed by a virtual path; a VCI (Virtual Channel Identifier) identifies a channel within a virtual path. A series of virtual paths make up a virtual circuit. F4 cells operate at the virtual path (VP) level, while F5 cells operate at the virtual channel (VC) level. F4 cells use the same VPI as the user data cells on VP connections, but use different predefined VCI values. F5 cells use the same VPI and VCI as the user data cells on the VC connections, and are distinguished from data cells by a predefinded Payload Type Identifier (PTI) in the cell header. Both F4 flows and F5 flows are bidirectional and have two types. • segment F4 flows (VCI=3) • end-to-end F4 flows (VCI=4) • segment F5 flows (PTI=100) • end-to-end F5 flows (PTI=101) OAM F4 or F5 tests are used to check virtual path or virtual channel availbility between two DSL devices. Segment flows are terminated at the connecting point CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 287 Chapter 25 Diagnostic which terminates a VP or VC segment. End-to-end flows are terminated at the end point of a VP or VC connection, where an ATM link is terminated. Segment loopback tests allow you to verify integrity of a PVC to the nearest neighboring ATM device. End-to-end loopback tests allow you to verify integrity of an end-toend PVC. Note: The DSLAM to which the CellPipe 7130 RG is connected must also support ATM F4 and/or F5 to use this test. Note: This screen is available only when you configure an ATM layer-2 interface. Figure 141 Maintenance > Diagnostic > OAM Ping Test The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 99 Maintenance > Diagnostic > OAM Ping Test LABEL DESCRIPTION Select a PVC on which you want to perform the loopback test. 288 F4 segment Press this to perform an OAM F4 segment loopback test. F4 end-end Press this to perform an OAM F4 end-to-end loopback test. F5 segment Press this to perform an OAM F5 segment loopback test. F5 end-end Press this to perform an OAM F5 end-to-end loopback test. CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide CHAPTER 26 Troubleshooting This chapter offers some suggestions to solve problems you might encounter. The potential problems are divided into the following categories. • Power, Hardware Connections, and LEDs • CellPipe 7130 RG Access and Login • Internet Access • USB Device Connection • Wireless LAN Troubleshooting 26.1 Power, Hardware Connections, and LEDs The CellPipe 7130 RG does not turn on. None of the LEDs turn on. Make sure the CellPipe 7130 RG is turned on. Make sure you are using the power adaptor or cord included with the CellPipe 7130 RG. Make sure the power adaptor or cord is connected to the CellPipe 7130 RG and plugged in to an appropriate power source. Make sure the power source is turned on. Turn the CellPipe 7130 RG off and on. If the problem continues, contact the vendor. One of the LEDs does not behave as expected. CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 289 Chapter 26 Troubleshooting Make sure you understand the normal behavior of the LED. See Section 1.6 on page 26. Check the hardware connections. See the Quick Start Guide. Inspect your cables for damage. Contact the vendor to replace any damaged cables. Turn the CellPipe 7130 RG off and on. If the problem continues, contact the vendor. 26.2 CellPipe 7130 RG Access and Login Note: Refer to Section 3.2 on page 83 for user level information. Each user level has its own account information for logging into the CellPipe 7130 RG. I forgot the IP address for the CellPipe 7130 RG. The default IP address is http://192.168.1.1. If you changed the IP address and have forgotten it, you might get the IP address of the CellPipe 7130 RG by looking up the IP address of the default gateway for your computer. To do this in most Windows computers, click Start > Run, enter cmd, and then enter ipconfig. The IP address of the Default Gateway might be the IP address of the CellPipe 7130 RG (it depends on the network), so enter this IP address in your Internet browser. If this does not work, you have to reset the device to its factory defaults. See Section 1.7 on page 28. I forgot the password. The default admin password is telus and the default user password is admin. Note: Refer to Section 3.2 on page 83 for user level information. Each user level has its own account information for logging into the CellPipe 7130 RG. 290 If this does not work, you have to reset the device to its factory defaults. See Section 1.7 on page 28. CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide Chapter 26 Troubleshooting I cannot see or access the Login screen (or other screens) in the web configurator. Make sure you are using the correct IP address. • The default IP address is http://192.168.1.1. • If you changed the IP address (Section on page 135), use the new IP address. • If you changed the IP address and have forgotten it, see the troubleshooting suggestions for I forgot the IP address for the CellPipe 7130 RG. Check the hardware connections, and make sure the LEDs are behaving as expected. See the Quick Start Guide. Make sure your Internet browser does not block pop-up windows and has JavaScripts and Java enabled. See Appendix C on page 351. Reset the device to its factory defaults, and try to access the CellPipe 7130 RG with the default IP address. See Section 1.7 on page 28. If the problem continues, contact the network administrator or vendor, or try one of the advanced suggestions. Advanced Suggestions • If your computer is connected to the WAN port or is connected wirelessly, use a computer that is connected to an ETHERNET port. • Try to access the CellPipe 7130 RG using another service, such as Telnet. If you can access the CellPipe 7130 RG, check the remote management settings and firewall rules to find out why the CellPipe 7130 RG does not respond to HTTPS. I can see the Login screen, but I cannot log in to the CellPipe 7130 RG. Make sure you have entered the user name and password correctly. The default admin user name is admin and default admin password is telus. These fields are case-sensitive, so make sure [Caps Lock] is not on. Note: Refer to Section 3.2 on page 83 for user level information. Each user level has its own account information for logging into the CellPipe 7130 RG. Turn the CellPipe 7130 RG off and on. CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 291 Chapter 26 Troubleshooting If this does not work, you have to reset the device to its factory defaults. See Section 26.1 on page 289. I cannot Telnet to the CellPipe 7130 RG. See the troubleshooting suggestions for I cannot see or access the Login screen (or other screens) in the web configurator. Ignore the suggestions about your browser. I cannot use FTP to upload / download the configuration file. / I cannot use FTP to upload new firmware. See the troubleshooting suggestions for I cannot see or access the Login screen (or other screens) in the web configurator. Ignore the suggestions about your browser. I cannot access the CellPipe 7130 RG again after configuring a new interface group. Make sure your computer is connected to a LAN port in the default group. Otherwise, you need to use the CellPipe 7130 RG’s LAN IP address for the new group to access the CellPipe 7130 RG again. 26.3 Internet Access I cannot access the Internet. 292 Check the hardware connections, and make sure the LEDs are behaving as expected. See the Quick Start Guide and Section 1.6 on page 26. Make sure you entered your ISP account information correctly in the WAN screens. These fields are case-sensitive, so make sure [Caps Lock] is not on. CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide Chapter 26 Troubleshooting If you are trying to access the Internet wirelessly, make sure the wireless settings in the wireless client are the same as the settings in the AP. Disconnect all the cables from your device, and follow the directions in the Quick Start Guide again. If the problem continues, contact your ISP. I cannot access the Internet through a DSL connection. Check if you have set the Network > WAN > Mode screen to DSL to have the CellPipe 7130 RG use the DSL port for Internet access. Make sure you configured a proper ATM or PTM layer-2 interface and WAN services with the Internet account information provided by your ISP. If you set up a WAN connection using bridging service, make sure you turn off the DHCP feature in the LAN screen to have the clients get WAN IP addresses directly from your ISP’s DHCP server. I cannot access the Internet through an Ethernet WAN connection. Check if you have set the Network > WAN > Mode screen to WAN to have the CellPipe 7130 RG use the Ethernet WAN port for Internet access. Make sure you connect the Ethernet WAN port to a DSL modem or router in your netwrok. Make sure you configured a proper Ethernet layer-2 interface and WAN services with the Internet account information provided by your ISP. If you set up a WAN connection using bridging service, make sure you turn off the DHCP feature in the LAN screen to have the clients get WAN IP addresses directly from your ISP’s DHCP server. I cannot connect to the Internet using a second DSL connection. ADSL and VDSL connections cannot work at the same time. You can only use one type of DSL connection, either ADSL or VDSL connection at one time. CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 293 Chapter 26 Troubleshooting I cannot create multiple connections of the same type. Your layer-2 interface must be in VLAN MUX Mode or MSC mode to create multiple WAN serivces for each connection. I cannot access the Internet anymore. I had access to the Internet (with the CellPipe 7130 RG), but my Internet connection is not available anymore. Check the hardware connections, and make sure the LEDs are behaving as expected. See the Quick Start Guide and Section 1.6 on page 26. Turn the CellPipe 7130 RG off and on. If the problem continues, contact your ISP. The Internet connection is slow or intermittent. There might be a lot of traffic on the network. Look at the LEDs, and check Section 1.6 on page 26. If the CellPipe 7130 RG is sending or receiving a lot of information, try closing some programs that use the Internet, especially peer-topeer applications. Check the signal strength. If the signal strength is low, try moving your computer closer to the CellPipe 7130 RG if possible, and look around to see if there are any devices that might be interfering with the wireless network (for example, microwaves, other wireless networks, and so on). Turn the CellPipe 7130 RG off and on. If the problem continues, contact the network administrator or vendor, or try one of the advanced suggestions. Advanced Suggestions • Check the settings for QoS. If it is disabled, you might consider activating it. If it is enabled, you might consider raising or lowering the priority for some applications. 294 CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide Chapter 26 Troubleshooting 26.4 USB Device Connection The CellPipe 7130 RG fails to detect my USB device. Disconnect the USB device. Reboot the CellPipe 7130 RG. If you are connecting a USB hard drive that comes with an external power supply, make sure it is connected to an appropriate power source that is on. Re-connect your USB device to the CellPipe 7130 RG. 26.5 Wireless LAN Troubleshooting I cannot access the CellPipe 7130 RG or ping any computer from the WLAN (wireless AP or router). Make sure the wireless LAN is enabled on the CellPipe 7130 RG. Make sure the wireless adapter on the wireless station is working properly. Make sure the wireless adapter installed on your computer is IEEE 802.11 compatible and supports the same wireless standard as the CellPipe 7130 RG. Make sure your computer (with a wireless adapter installed) is within the transmission range of the CellPipe 7130 RG. Check that both the CellPipe 7130 RG and your wireless station are using the same wireless and wireless security settings. Check if MAC Filter is configured to deny wireless access to certain MAC addresses to the CellPipe 7130 RG. See Chapter 7 Wireless LAN in the User’s Guide for more information. I cannot use WDS connection. CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 295 Chapter 26 Troubleshooting 296 You can use WDS only when WPS is disabled or wireless security is set to “No Security”, “WEP”, “WPA-PSK” or “WPA2-PSK”. The wireless security settings apply to both WDS links and the connections between the CellPipe 7130 RG and any wireless clients. WDS is only compatible with other devices of the same model. CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide CHAPTER 27 Product Specifications The following tables summarize the CellPipe 7130 RG’s hardware and firmware features. 27.1 Hardware Specifications Table 100 Hardware Specifications Dimensions 208 (W) x 178 (D) x 36 (H) mm Weight 465 g Power Specification 12 V 1.5 A Power Input 100 ~ 240 VAC 50~60HZ RESET Button Restores factory defaults WPS Button at least 1 second: enable WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup) WLAN Button at least 1 second: enable wireless LAN Antennas One attached external dipole antenna, 2dBi Built-in Switch Four auto-negotiating, auto MDI/MDI-X 10/100 Mbps RJ-45 Ethernet ports DSL Port One RJ-11 connector over POTS Giga Ethernet WAN Port One RJ-45 connector for GBE WAN HomePNA Coaxial Port One port for HPNA v3.1 access, coax F type connector USB Ports One USB v2.0 port for file sharing Operation Temperature 0º C ~ 40º C Storage Temperature -20º ~ 60º C Operation Humidity 20% ~ 85% RH (non-condensing) Storage Humidity 20% ~ 90% RH (non-condensing) CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 297 Chapter 27 Product Specifications 27.2 Firmware Specifications Table 101 Firmware Specifications Default IP Address 192.168.1.1 Default Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0 (24 bits) Default User Name admin root tech Note: Refer to Section 3.2 on page 83 for user level information. Each user level has its own account information for logging into the CellPipe 7130 RG. Default Password telus DHCP Server IP Pool 192.168.1.33 to 192.168.1.132 Static Routes 16 Device Management Use the web configurator to easily configure the rich range of features on the CellPipe 7130 RG. Wireless Functionality Allow the IEEE 802.11b, IEEE 802.11g and/or IEEE 802.11n wireless clients to connect to the CellPipe 7130 RG wirelessly. Enable wireless security (WEP, WPA(2), WPA(2)-PSK) and/or MAC filtering to protect your wireless network. (wireless devices only) Firmware Upgrade Download new firmware (when available) from the web site and use the web configurator to put it on the CellPipe 7130 RG. Note: Only upload firmware for your specific model! Configuration Backup & Restoration Make a copy of the CellPipe 7130 RG’s configuration. You can put it back on the CellPipe 7130 RG later if you decide to revert back to an earlier configuration. HomePNA (Home Phoneline Networking Alliance, also known as HPNA) 3.1 Extend your Internet connection to the coaxial outlets in your house. HPNA is a home networking technology for carrying DLNA Server The CellPipe 7130 RG is a DLNA-compliant media server that lets DLNA-compliant media clients play video, audio, and photo content files stored on the CellPipe 7130 RG. data over existing coaxial cables and telephone wiring. The DLNA (Digital Living Network Alliance) group of companies works to make products compatible and able to work in a home network in order to make digital living easy and seamless. DLNA clients play files stored on DLNA servers. Port Forwarding 298 If you have a server (mail or web server for example) on your network, you can use this feature to let people access it from the Internet. CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide Chapter 27 Product Specifications Table 101 Firmware Specifications (continued) DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) Use this feature to have the CellPipe 7130 RG assign IP addresses, an IP default gateway and DNS servers to computers on your network. Your device can also act as a surrogate DHCP server (DHCP Relay) where it relays IP address assignment from the actual real DHCP server to the clients. Dynamic DNS Support With Dynamic DNS (Domain Name System) support, you can use a fixed URL with a dynamic IP address. You must register for this service with a Dynamic DNS service provider. IP Multicast IP multicast is used to send traffic to a specific group of computers. The CellPipe 7130 RG supports versions 2 and 3 of IGMP (Internet Group Management Protocol) used to join multicast groups (see RFC 2236). Time and Date Get the current time and date from an external server when you turn on your CellPipe 7130 RG. You can also set the time manually. These dates and times are then used in logs. Logs Use logs for troubleshooting. You can send logs from the CellPipe 7130 RG to an external syslog server. Universal Plug and Play (UPnP) A UPnP-enabled device can dynamically join a network, obtain an IP address and convey its capabilities to other devices on the network. QoS (Quality of Service) You can efficiently manage traffic on your network by reserving bandwidth and giving priority to certain types of traffic and/or to particular computers. Remote Management This allows you to decide whether a service (HTTPS or FTP traffic for example) from a computer on a network (LAN or WAN for example) can access the CellPipe 7130 RG. PPPoE Support (RFC2516) PPPoE (Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet) emulates a dial-up connection. It allows your ISP to use their existing network configuration with newer broadband technologies such as ADSL. The PPPoE driver on your device is transparent to the computers on the LAN, which see only Ethernet and are not aware of PPPoE thus saving you from having to manage PPPoE clients on individual computers. Other PPPoE Features PPPoE idle time out PPPoE dial on demand Packet Filters CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide Your device’s packet filtering function allows added network security and management. 299 Chapter 27 Product Specifications Table 101 Firmware Specifications (continued) VDSL Standards ITU-T G.993.1 VDSL Annex A (North American) Standard ITU G.993.2 (2/06) VDSL2 Annex A (North American) Standard • • Corrigendum 1 (12/06) + Amendment 1 (4/07) + Amendment 1 Corrigendum 1 (7/07) Corrigendum 2 (7/07) + Amendment 2 (2/08) + Amendment 4 (1/09) Supported band plans: • • Plan 997 (symmetrical) Plan 998 (asymmetrical) Supported profiles: 8a, 8b, 8c, 8d, 12a, 12b, 17a POTS overlay, Supported US0 types: A (normal US0), M (extended US0), - (no US0) ITU G.994.1 (2/07) (G.hs) Handshake Amendment 1 (11/07) + Amendment 2 (4/08) Supported Transport Protocol Specific Transmission Convergence (TPS-TC) functions: PTM (via 64/65b encapsulation method defined in IEEE 802.3ah-2004) HDLC encapsulation for pre-VDSL2 standard interoperability Impulse Noise Protection (INP) up to 16 symbols SNR target met, delay maximized: The maximum allowable delay will be 16 ms for down and 16ms for up. Support for ITU-T G.INP Dying Gasp support Modulation : Multi-Carrier-Modulation (MCM) Interleaving: General Convolution Support of maximum SNRM configuration (directed by the central office) Seamless Rate Adaptation (SRA) as described in Amendment 1 of G.993.2 Tone Spacing: 4.3KHz/8.6KHz 300 CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide Chapter 27 Product Specifications Table 101 Firmware Specifications (continued) ADSL Standards ADSL ITU-T G.992.1 (G.dmt), Annex A and ETSI TS 101 388 V1.3.1 (05/2002) 1TR112 (U-R2 Deutsche Telekom AG) Version 7.0 including support of Dying Gasp and report of Self-Test-Result (ATU-T Register#3) EOC as specified in ITU-T G.992.1 (G.dmt) Handshake ITU G.994.1 (G.hs) Supported Transport Protocol Specific Transmission Convergence (TPS-TC) functions: ATM PTM (via 64/65b encapsulation method defined in IEEE 802.3ah-2004) Support of Vendor ID during Handshake in the Vendor ID information block including vendor specific information as specified in 1TR112 and ITU-T G.994.1 (G.hs) ADSL ITU-T G.992.2 (G.lite) ADSL2 ITU-T G.992.3 (G.dmt.bis), Annex A RE-ADSL2 ITU-T G.992.3 (G.dmt.bis), Annex L ADSL2 ITU-T G.992.4 (G.lite.bis), Annex A ADSL2+ ITU-T G.992.5, Annex A Support Multi-Mode Standard: ANSI T1.413 Issue 2; G.dmt (ITU-T G.992.1), ADSL2 (ITU-T G.992.3), ADSL2+ (ITU-T G.992.5) Dual Latency support Other Protocol Support PPP (Point-to-Point Protocol) link layer protocol Transparent bridging for unsupported network layer protocols RIP I/RIP II ICMP ATM QoS IP Multicasting IGMP v2 and v3 IGMP Proxy Management Embedded Web Configurator Remote Firmware Upgrade Embedded FTP/TFTP Server for firmware upgrade and configuration file backup and restore Syslog TR-069 TR-064 CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 301 Chapter 27 Product Specifications The following list, which is not exhaustive, illustrates the standards supported in the CellPipe 7130 RG. Table 102 Standards Supported STANDARD DESCRIPTION RFC 1058 RIP-1 (Routing Information Protocol) RFC 1112 IGMP v1 RFC 1157 SNMPv1: Simple Network Management Protocol version 1 RFC 1305 Network Time Protocol (NTP version 3) RFC 1441 SNMPv2 Simple Network Management Protocol version 2 RFC 1483 Multiprotocol Encapsulation over ATM Adaptation Layer 5 RFC 1631 IP Network Address Translator (NAT) RFC 1661 The Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP) RFC 1723 RIP-2 (Routing Information Protocol) RFC 2236 Internet Group Management Protocol, Version 2. RFC 2364 PPP over AAL5 (PPP over ATM over ADSL) RFC 2516 A Method for Transmitting PPP Over Ethernet (PPPoE) RFC 2684 Multiprotocol Encapsulation over ATM Adaptation Layer 5 RFC 2766 Network Address Translation - Protocol IEEE 802.11 Also known by the brand Wi-Fi, denotes a set of Wireless LAN/ WLAN standards developed by working group 11 of the IEEE LAN/MAN Standards Committee (IEEE 802). IEEE 802.11b Uses the 2.4 gigahertz (GHz) band IEEE 802.11g Uses the 2.4 gigahertz (GHz) band IEEE 802.11d Standard for Local and Metropolitan Area Networks: Media Access Control (MAC) Bridges IEEE 802.11x Port Based Network Access Control. IEEE 802.11e QoS IEEE 802.11 e Wireless LAN for Quality of Service ANSI T1.413, Issue 2 Asymmetric Digital Subscriber Line (ADSL) standard. G dmt(G.992.1) G.992.1 Asymmetrical Digital Subscriber Line (ADSL) Transceivers ITU G.992.1 (G.DMT) ITU standard for ADSL using discrete multitone modulation. ITU G.992.2 (G. Lite) ITU standard for ADSL using discrete multitone modulation. ITU G.992.3 (G.dmt.bis) ITU standard (also referred to as ADSL2) that extends the capability of basic ADSL in data rates. ITU G.992.4 (G.lite.bis) ITU standard (also referred to as ADSL2) that extends the capability of basic ADSL in data rates. ITU G.992.5 (ADSL2+) ITU standard (also referred to as ADSL2+) that extends the capability of basic ADSL by doubling the number of downstream bits. 302 ITU-T G.993.2 (VDSL2) ITU standard that defines VDSL2. TR-069 DSL Forum Standard for CPE Wan Management. TR-064 DSL Forum LAN-Side DSL CPE Configuration CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide Chapter 27 Product Specifications CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 303 Chapter 27 Product Specifications 304 CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide APPENDIX Network Troubleshooting Overview The three most basic utilities for troubleshooting network connection issues are: ipconfig, ping and tracert. This appendix gives a quick overview of them as well as some common usage examples. Moreover, three slightly more advanced utilities are also discussed: arp, route, and netstat. Note: All command examples here use the Microsoft Windows operating system version of the commands. Before Getting Started Before using the commands described in this section, ensure that you have the TCP/IP networking component installed and properly configured for your network adapter. Click Start > Control Panel > Network Connections and then open a Local Area Connection to display the following screen. Figure 142 TCP/IP Networking Component CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 305 Appendix A Network Troubleshooting Note: Most operating systems ship with TCP/IP already installed and enabled. See your Windows documentation for details on installing or configuring TCP/IP. The Command Line Interface To open the Windows command line interface: Click Start > Run. In the Run dialog box, enter cmd then click OK. The Command Prompt window opens. Command Syntax and Parameters Command descriptions always indicate the default syntax you must use when entering them on the command line. Some commands require additional parameters in order to execute properly. Some may have optional parameters. Parameters are displayed as follows: command [parameter] 306 CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide Appendix A Network Troubleshooting For example, the date command has the optional /t and date parameters. If you do not use either of them and enter just date by itself, then the system shows you the date it is currently using and then prompts you to change it. C:\>date The current date is: 2009/10/21 Enter the new date: (mm-dd-yy) However, if you use the /t parameter it just displays the date and nothing more. C:\>date /t 2009/10/21 C:\> To view the parameters for any given command, enter help [command]. ipconfig The ipconfig command line utility allows you to display current network (TCP/IP) configuration settings and, in some cases, adjust them. When you have network connectivity problems, the first thing you should do is run this command to ensure that your device or computer does in fact have an IP address as well as display the source of that IP address (such as a default gateway). Syntax: ipconfig Parameters: ipconfig [/release] [/renew] There are other parameters, but these are the only ones you need to use for now. The following examples show the typical output of this command: C:\>ipconfig Windows IP Configuration Ethernet adapter Local Area Connection: Connection-specific IP Address. . . . . Subnet Mask . . . . Default Gateway . . DNS . . . . . . Suffix . . . . . . . . . . . . example.com 192.168.1.1 255.255.255.0 1.1.1.4 C:\> CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 307 Appendix A Network Troubleshooting Here you can see that the device has IP address of 1.1.1.1 and example.com is its Domain Name Server (DNS). If the device is disconnected then you would see the following instead: Ethernet adapter Local Area Connection: Media State . . . . . . . . . . . : Media disconnected If the device is connected but cannot get an IP address then you would see: Ethernet adapter Local Area Connection: Connection-specific IP Address. . . . . Subnet Mask . . . . Default Gateway . . DNS . . . . . . Suffix . . . . . . . . . . . . : 0.0.0.0 : 0.0.0.0 In some cases, your computer may be properly connected to the network or the CellPipe 7130 RG but it is not receiving an IP address for whatever reason. Use the /release parameter followed by /renew: C:\>ipconfig /release Windows IP Configuration Ethernet adapter Local Area Connection: Connection-specific IP Address. . . . . Subnet Mask . . . . Default Gateway . . DNS . . . . . . Suffix . . . . . . . . . . . . : 0.0.0.0 : 0.0.0.0 C:\>ipconfig /renew Windows IP Configuration Ethernet adapter Local Area Connection: Connection-specific IP Address. . . . . Subnet Mask . . . . Default Gateway . . DNS . . . . . . Suffix . . . . . . . . . . . . example.com 192.168.1.2 255.255.255.0 2.2.2.4 C:\> 308 CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide Appendix A Network Troubleshooting ping The ping command line utility allows you to verify the connection and latency between your computer and either the CellPipe 7130 RG or other devices on the network. If you cannot reach a target using this command, then it may indicate possible network trouble. Syntax: ping target The target can be an IP address or a host name. Parameters: ping [-w timeout] target The timeout parameter allows you to input the number of seconds (in milliseconds) that your computer waits for a reply. The following examples show the typical output of this command: C:\>ping www.example.com Pinging a1524.g.akamai.net [203.69.113.18] with 32 bytes of data: Reply Reply Reply Reply from from from from 203.69.113.18: 203.69.113.18: 203.69.113.18: 203.69.113.18: bytes=32 bytes=32 bytes=32 bytes=32 time=6ms time=6ms time=6ms time=7ms TTL=56 TTL=56 TTL=56 TTL=48 Ping statistics for 203.69.113.18: Packets: Sent = 4, Received = 4, Lost = 0 (0% loss), Approximate round trip times in milli-seconds: Minimum = 6ms, Maximum = 7ms, Average = 6ms The number of bytes here indicates packet size. As most data is broken up into smaller packets, this makes the ping test fairly representative of a typical network connection. The default packet size on Windows is 32 bytes. Time is the number of milliseconds the data requires to make the roundtrip journey from your computer to the destination host and back again. The lower the number, the faster the connection between the two points. Note: Some hosts are deliberately configured to not respond to ping requests. As such, we suggest pinging two or three hosts when performing your ping test. CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 309 Appendix A Network Troubleshooting If your ping test fails to get a response, then you may see a message like this: C:\>ping www.example.com Pinging www.example.com [192.0.32.10] with 32 bytes of data: Request Request Request Request timed timed timed timed out. out. out. out. Ping statistics for 192.0.32.10: Packets: Sent = 4, Received = 0, Lost = 4 (100% loss), C:\> When a request times out it may mean: • your computer is not connected to the network • your Internet access device is not connected to the network • or the device which you are pinging is not connected to the network If you think the destination is active but responding slowly, you can try increasing the ping timeout value from its default of 4 seconds (4000 milliseconds) to something like 8 seconds (or 8000 milliseconds). C:\>ping -w 8000 www.example.com Pinging www.example.com [192.0.32.10] with 32 bytes of data: Reply Reply Reply Reply from from from from 192.0.32.10: 192.0.32.10: 192.0.32.10: 192.0.32.10: bytes=32 bytes=32 bytes=32 bytes=32 time=157ms time=154ms time=152ms time=162ms TTL=238 TTL=238 TTL=236 TTL=236 Ping statistics for 192.0.32.10: Packets: Sent = 4, Received = 4, Lost = 0 (0% loss), Approximate round trip times in milli-seconds: Minimum = 152ms, Maximum = 162ms, Average = 156ms C:\> A long ping response could indicate network problems: • on your side of the connection • between the start and end points of the connection • on the receiving end To determine where the slowdown is, you may need to use traceroute. 310 CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide Appendix A Network Troubleshooting tracert The tracert command line utility allows you to determine the network path between your computer and a host you specify. When you communicate with other devices on a network, the data is not often sent directly from point A to point B; rather, it moves through a series of intermediate servers, passed along until eventually the server closest to point B hands it off directly. This command can be useful for helping determine whether your connection issues are happening locally, somewhere in transit, or at the destination end. • Each step in the chain of connections is called a ‘hop’. • The time it takes for a server at any given hop to pass the data packet is called ‘latency’ and is measured in milliseconds. When a tracert command is run, it sends out a burst of three data packets per hop. The results table, therefore, always displays three values for latency in addition to the IP address and domain name (where available) of the server on that leg of the journey. Syntax: tracert target The target can be an IP address or a host name. Parameters: tracert [-d] [-h maximumhops ] target There are other parameters but these are the only ones you need to use for now. CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 311 Appendix A Network Troubleshooting The following examples show the typical output of this command: C:\>tracert www.example.com Tracing route to www.example.com [192.0.32.10] over a maximum of 30 hops: 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 <1 10 138 138 128 140 154 154 562 554 254 154 ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms <1 137 138 139 139 153 154 553 554 254 253 ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms <1 10 138 138 140 136 137 137 553 553 248 154 ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms 172.23.x.x 172.23.x.x 172.23.x.x 219-87-158-97.static.tfn.tw [219.87.158.97] 10.42.232.150 hc-c12r2.router.tw [220.128.7.86] tp-s2-c12r12.router.tw [220.128.2.90] pr03-s2.tp.tw [220.128.4.181] 220-128-3-249.NET-IP.tw [220.128.3.249] r11-pa.NET-IP.net [211.72.108.129] po4-0.core01.sjc04.atlas.com [154.54.11.129] te9-2.mpd01.sjc04.atlas.com [154.54.0.173] 61.58.33.173 xe-0-0-0.r20.gin.ntt.net [129.250.16.161] as-2.r21.tokyjp01.jp.ntt.net [129.250.4.81] 38.106.6.34 po-2.r00.lsanca19.us.ntt.net [129.250.6.42] 204.1.254.150 192.0.32.10 Trace complete. C:\> Here, the tracert to www.example.com took 18 hops to reach its destination. Looking at the latency data, you’ll see the first slow down happens at hop 10. The extremely low latency on the first few hops indicates a network local to the computer where the tracert command originated, such as a home or office LAN. The packets then move onto the local WAN (such as your Internet Service Provider’s network). Because of the close proximity of those servers to your computer, the latency remains low. Once the data packets move out of the regional network to the first international server (at hop 10 in this example), the latency increases. This is because of the distance between the regional and international servers - it physically takes longer for the response to get back to your computer. Finally, on transition hop 15 from the server in Japan to the server in California, another latency spike occurs. If you were having connection problems, this would most likely be the source of it. For whatever reason, the server in Japan has a less than optimal connection with its counterpart in the United States. 312 CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide Appendix A Network Troubleshooting In this example, we abridge the tracert results table to show only server IP addresses and not domain names by using the -d parameter. We also use the -h parameter to limit the number of hops to 5 to test local connections only. C:\>tracert -d -h 5 www.example.com Tracing route to a1524.g.akamai.net [203.69.113.16] over a maximum of 5 hops: <1 17 24 ms ms ms ms ms <1 16 25 ms ms ms ms ms <1 14 24 ms ms ms ms ms 172.23.31.254 172.23.6.113 172.23.6.253 218.160.188.254 10.42.232.150 Trace complete. C:\> arp Local network transmission is based on MAC addresses. Data transmission between two networks is based on IP addresses. Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) is a protocol that converts IP addresses into MAC addresses. Before a computer transmits data to an IP address on the same network, it will check whether the IP address exists in its ARP table. If it does, the computer then sends the data directly to the mapped MAC address. If it does not, the computer broadcasts an ARP request to the network. The host whose MAC address maps to the IP address responds. When you use ping to check the connection to a computer, no response does not mean the computer is not alive on the network. The destination computer may be configured not to respond to any ping requests. However, you can use the arp -a command line utility to check the IP addresses and MAC addresses of your neighboring computers or devices. Syntax: arp -a Parameters: arp [-d inet_addr] [-s inet_addr eth_addr] The -d parameter can be use alone to remove all entries from an arp table or in conjunction with an IP address to remove just that IP address (inet_addr). The s parameter allows you to add entries based on IP address (inet_addr) and/or MAC address (eth_addr). There are other parameters but these are the only ones you need to use for now. CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 313 Appendix A Network Troubleshooting To check the ARP table on a Windows XP computer: Click Start > Programs > Accessories > Command Prompt. The Command Prompt screen appears. Type arp -a and press [Enter]. The following examples show the typical output of this command: C:\>arp -a Interface: 172.16.1.28 on Interface 0x1000003 Internet Address Physical Address 172.16.1.5 00-00-aa-19-07-38 172.16.1.25 00-18-f3-f0-aa-34 172.16.1.44 00-0e-a6-2c-60-10 172.16.1.210 00-19-cb-e9-66-33 172.16.1.254 00-04-80-4c-a8-05 Type dynamic dynamic dynamic dynamic dynamic In this example, the Physical Address indicates the associated MAC address. A Type entry with dynamic means it was dynamically learned through an ARP response. Use the arp -s [inet_addr eth_addr] to manually add an ARP entry if you want your computer to connect to the host with the specified MAC address when you access the specified IP address. You can additionally check whether the MAC address associated with the IP address that you are looking for is correct. In some circumstances, your ARP table may keep a wrong MAC address until the entry expires. You can then manually update the ARP table. To update the ARP table: Type arp -d [inet_addr] or just use arp -d to remove all entries in the ARP table. For example, type arp -d 172.16.1.5. Type ping 172.16.1.5 and press [Enter]. Next, use the arp -a command again to check whether the MAC address matches what you expected. If it does not, another computer may be using a duplicate IP address on the network. Change the IP address on either computer to an unused one to fix this problem. route The route command line utility allows you to display or adjust your computer’s network table. The routing table on your computer contains the default gateway 314 CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide Appendix A Network Troubleshooting and other route information. When your computer wants to access an IP address on another network, it references this table. Syntax: route print Parameters: For the purposes of this section, the print parameter is the most important. If you enter route by itself, the command’s help page displays. The following example shows the typical output of this command: C:\>route print =========================================================================== Interface List 0x1 ........................... MS TCP Loopback interface 0x1000003 ...00 02 e3 a1 b2 c3 ...... Broadcom NetXtreme Gigabit Ethernet Driver =========================================================================== =========================================================================== Active Routes: Network Destination Netmask Gateway Interface Metric 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 172.16.1.254 172.16.1.32 127.0.0.0 255.0.0.0 127.0.0.1 127.0.0.1 172.16.1.0 255.255.255.0 172.16.1.32 172.16.1.32 172.16.1.32 255.255.255.255 127.0.0.1 127.0.0.1 172.16.255.255 255.255.255.255 172.16.1.32 172.16.1.32 224.0.0.0 224.0.0.0 172.16.1.32 172.16.1.32 255.255.255.255 255.255.255.255 172.16.1.32 172.16.1.32 Default Gateway: 172.16.1.254 =========================================================================== Persistent Routes: None The following table describes labels shown in the command output: Table 103 route print Command Output OUTPUT DESCRIPTION Active Routes This section lists all available routes that are automatically learned from the network. Network Destination The destination IP address of packets that this route entry is to route. The destination can be an IP address for a network or host, 0.0.0.0 for the default route or 127.0.0.0 for the loopback interface which is used mainly for self-test. The destination 224.0.0.0 is for multicasting packets or reserved for testing. But if you are not using multicast applications, just ignore it. The destination 255.255.255.255 is used to find computers when an IP address is not known. For example, before the DHCP IP address of your computer is determined, your computer sends packets with the destination looking for DHCP servers on the network. CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 315 Appendix A Network Troubleshooting Table 103 route print Command Output OUTPUT DESCRIPTION Netmask The destination subnet mask of packets that this route entry is to route. The subnet mask can be the apropriate subnet mask for a network, 255.255.255.255 for a host, or 0.0.0.0 for the default route. Gateway The IP address of the gateway through which this computer should send the matched packets. Interface The IP address of an physical interface on this computer used to send the matched packets for this route entry. Metric The metric (hop count) of this route. Normally, the lower the number, the faster to a destination. Default Gateway The IP address of the gateway through which this computer sends all the rest packets if this computer cannot find any other matched routes for the packets. Persistent Routes This section lists all routes that are manually configured. In this example, the 172.16.1.0 is the network address. The 172.16.1.32 is the address of the local computer. 172.16.1.255 is the network broadcast address which sends broadcast packets to all computers on the 172.16.1.x network. 172.16.1.254 is the default gateway. You may have more than one 0.0.0.0 entry if your computer has two or more network cards installed. This may casue packets to be routed somewhere unexpected. Delete all 0.0.0.0 entries except the one that you want to use for the default gateway. In the following example, the computer uses the first 0.0.0.0 entry for the default gateway. Network Destination 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 Netmask 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 Gateway 192.168.1.254 172.16.1.254 Interface 192.168.1.33 172.16.1.32 Metric • To delete the route to the default route with the gateway of 192.168.1.254, type: route delete 0.0.0.0 mask 0.0.0.0 192.168.1.254. • To add a route to the destination 172.16.2.0 with the subnet mask of 255.255.255.0, the next hop address of 172.16.1.250, and the cost metric of 7, type: route add 172.16.2.0 mask 255.255.255.0 172.16.1.250 metric 7. • To add a persistent route to the destination 172.16.3.0 with the subnet mask of 255.255.255.0 and the next hop address of 172.16.1.252, type: route -p add 172.16.3.0 mask 255.255.255.0 172.16.1.252. Note that the metric will be set to 1 if you do not specify any. 316 CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide Appendix A Network Troubleshooting netstat The netstat command line utility is used to show Ethernet statistics and current TCP/IP network connections. Syntax: netstat With no parameters, this command simply displays only active statistics for ports that are currently in use by one process or another. Parameter: netstat [-a] [-e] The -a parameter displays all available listening ports and connections whether they are active or not, while the -e parameter displays Ethernet statistics. There are other parameters but these are the only ones you need to use for now. The following examples show the typical output of this command: C:\>netstat Active Connections Proto TCP TCP TCP TCP TCP TCP TCP TCP TCP TCP TCP TCP TCP TCP TCP Local Address COMPUTERA:1056 COMPUTERA:1091 COMPUTERA:1120 COMPUTERA:3243 COMPUTERA:3244 COMPUTERA:3246 COMPUTERA:3247 COMPUTERA:5091 COMPUTERA:5152 COMPUTERA:27015 COMPUTERA:40000 COMPUTERA:3229 COMPUTERA:3234 COMPUTERA:3237 COMPUTERA:3240 Foreign Address localhost:5091 localhost:27015 localhost:40000 localhost:3244 localhost:3243 localhost:3247 localhost:3246 localhost:1056 localhost:3245 localhost:1091 localhost:1120 172.20.0.201:http 172.16.1.29:1155 172.16.1.29:1155 172.16.1.29:1155 State ESTABLISHED ESTABLISHED ESTABLISHED ESTABLISHED ESTABLISHED ESTABLISHED ESTABLISHED ESTABLISHED CLOSE_WAIT ESTABLISHED ESTABLISHED CLOSE_WAIT ESTABLISHED ESTABLISHED ESTABLISHED C:\> CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 317 Appendix A Network Troubleshooting Use the -a parameter to display all possible connections to your device, not just the ones that are currently in use: C:\>netstat -a Active Connections Proto TCP TCP TCP TCP TCP TCP TCP TCP TCP TCP TCP TCP TCP TCP TCP TCP TCP TCP Local Address COMPUTERA:http COMPUTERA:http COMPUTERA:2744 COMPUTERA:5152 COMPUTERA:5152 COMPUTERA:5354 COMPUTERA:27015 COMPUTERA:40000 COMPUTERA:40000 COMPUTERA:netbios-ssn COMPUTERA:4177 COMPUTERA:4178 COMPUTERA:4180 COMPUTERA:4182 COMPUTERA:4317 COMPUTERA:4539 COMPUTERA:netbios-ssn COMPUTERA:netbios-ssn Foreign Address COMPUTERA:0 172.16.x.x:4036 NAS:microsoft-ds 172.16.x.x.example.com:0 localhost:4067 172.16.x.x.example.com:0 172.16.x.x.example.com:0 localhost:0 localhost:1120 172.16.x.x.example.com:0 172.16.x.x:1155 172.16.x.x:1155 172.16.x.x:1155 172.16.x.x:1025 NAS:microsoft-ds NAS:microsoft-ds 172.16.x.x:0 172.16.x.x:0 State LISTENING ESTABLISHED ESTABLISHED LISTENING CLOSE_WAIT LISTENING LISTENING LISTENING ESTABLISHED LISTENING ESTABLISHED ESTABLISHED ESTABLISHED ESTABLISHED ESTABLISHED TIME_WAIT LISTENING LISTENING C:\> The following table describes the three entries in the output example above: Table 104 netstat -a Command Output 318 OUTPUT DESCRIPTION TCP COMPUTERA:http COMPUTERA:0 LISTENING A web server is available on COMPUTERA as an HTTP service is in a LISTENING state. TCP COMPUTERA:http 172.16.1.29:4036 ESTABLISHED A computer with an IP address of 172.16.1.29 is accessing the web service on the COMPUTERA. TCP COMPUTERA:2744 NAS:microsoft-ds ESTABLISHED COMPUTERA has established a TCP/IP NETBIOS connection (microsoft-ds) with a NAS device. CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide Appendix A Network Troubleshooting Additionally, you can use netstat -e to display Ethernet statistics as the following example. C:\ >netstat -e Interface Statistics Bytes Unicast packets Non-unicast packets Discards Errors Unknown protocols CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide Received Sent 25250033 38838 38227 787 7060325 34744 175 35 319 Appendix A Network Troubleshooting 320 CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide APPENDIX Setting Up Your Computer’s IP Address Note: Your specific CellPipe 7130 RG may not support all of the operating systems described in this appendix. See the product specifications for more information about which operating systems are supported. This appendix shows you how to configure the IP settings on your computer in order for it to be able to communicate with the other devices on your network. Windows Vista/XP/2000, Mac OS 9/OS X, and all versions of UNIX/LINUX include the software components you need to use TCP/IP on your computer. If you manually assign IP information instead of using a dynamic IP, make sure that your network’s computers have IP addresses that place them in the same subnet. In this appendix, you can set up an IP address for: • Windows XP/NT/2000 on page 321 • Windows Vista on page 325 • Windows 7 on page 329 • Mac OS X: 10.3 and 10.4 on page 333 • Mac OS X: 10.5 and 10.6 on page 337 • Linux: Ubuntu 8 (GNOME) on page 340 • Linux: openSUSE 10.3 (KDE) on page 345 Windows XP/NT/2000 The following example uses the default Windows XP display theme but can also apply to Windows 2000 and Windows NT. CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 321 Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer’s IP Address Click Start > Control Panel. Figure 143 Windows XP: Start Menu In the Control Panel, click the Network Connections icon. Figure 144 Windows XP: Control Panel 322 CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer’s IP Address Right-click Local Area Connection and then select Properties. Figure 145 Windows XP: Control Panel > Network Connections > Properties On the General tab, select Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) and then click Properties. Figure 146 Windows XP: Local Area Connection Properties CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 323 Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer’s IP Address The Internet Protocol TCP/IP Properties window opens. Figure 147 Windows XP: Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties Select Obtain an IP address automatically if your network administrator or ISP assigns your IP address dynamically. Select Use the following IP Address and fill in the IP address, Subnet mask, and Default gateway fields if you have a static IP address that was assigned to you by your network administrator or ISP. You may also have to enter a Preferred DNS server and an Alternate DNS server, if that information was provided. Click OK to close the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties window. Click OK to close the Local Area Connection Properties window. Verifying Settings 324 Click Start > All Programs > Accessories > Command Prompt. CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer’s IP Address In the Command Prompt window, type "ipconfig" and then press [ENTER]. You can also go to Start > Control Panel > Network Connections, right-click a network connection, click Status and then click the Support tab to view your IP address and connection information. Windows Vista This section shows screens from Windows Vista Professional. Click Start > Control Panel. Figure 148 Windows Vista: Start Menu In the Control Panel, click the Network and Internet icon. Figure 149 Windows Vista: Control Panel CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 325 Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer’s IP Address Click the Network and Sharing Center icon. Figure 150 Windows Vista: Network And Internet Click Manage network connections. Figure 151 Windows Vista: Network and Sharing Center Right-click Local Area Connection and then select Properties. Figure 152 Windows Vista: Network and Sharing Center Note: During this procedure, click Continue whenever Windows displays a screen saying that it needs your permission to continue. 326 CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer’s IP Address Select Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) and then select Properties. Figure 153 Windows Vista: Local Area Connection Properties CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 327 Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer’s IP Address The Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) Properties window opens. Figure 154 Windows Vista: Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) Properties Select Obtain an IP address automatically if your network administrator or ISP assigns your IP address dynamically. Select Use the following IP Address and fill in the IP address, Subnet mask, and Default gateway fields if you have a static IP address that was assigned to you by your network administrator or ISP. You may also have to enter a Preferred DNS server and an Alternate DNS server, if that information was provided.Click Advanced. Click OK to close the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties window. 10 Click OK to close the Local Area Connection Properties window. Verifying Settings 328 Click Start > All Programs > Accessories > Command Prompt. CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer’s IP Address In the Command Prompt window, type "ipconfig" and then press [ENTER]. You can also go to Start > Control Panel > Network Connections, right-click a network connection, click Status and then click the Support tab to view your IP address and connection information. Windows 7 This section shows screens from Windows 7 Enterprise. Click Start > Control Panel. Figure 155 Windows 7: Start Menu In the Control Panel, click View network status and tasks under the Network and Internet category. Figure 156 Windows 7: Control Panel CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 329 Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer’s IP Address Click Change adapter settings. Figure 157 Windows 7: Network And Sharing Center Double click Local Area Connection and then select Properties. Figure 158 Windows 7: Local Area Connection Status Note: During this procedure, click Continue whenever Windows displays a screen saying that it needs your permission to continue. 330 CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer’s IP Address Select Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) and then select Properties. Figure 159 Windows 7: Local Area Connection Properties CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 331 Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer’s IP Address The Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) Properties window opens. Figure 160 Windows 7: Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) Properties Select Obtain an IP address automatically if your network administrator or ISP assigns your IP address dynamically. Select Use the following IP Address and fill in the IP address, Subnet mask, and Default gateway fields if you have a static IP address that was assigned to you by your network administrator or ISP. You may also have to enter a Preferred DNS server and an Alternate DNS server, if that information was provided. Click Advanced if you want to configure advanced settings for IP, DNS and WINS. Click OK to close the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties window. Click OK to close the Local Area Connection Properties window. Verifying Settings 332 Click Start > All Programs > Accessories > Command Prompt. In the Command Prompt window, type "ipconfig" and then press [ENTER]. CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer’s IP Address The IP settings are displayed as follows. Figure 161 Windows 7: Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) Properties Mac OS X: 10.3 and 10.4 The screens in this section are from Mac OS X 10.4 but can also apply to 10.3. Click Apple > System Preferences. Figure 162 Mac OS X 10.4: Apple Menu CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 333 Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer’s IP Address In the System Preferences window, click the Network icon. Figure 163 Mac OS X 10.4: System Preferences When the Network preferences pane opens, select Built-in Ethernet from the network connection type list, and then click Configure. Figure 164 Mac OS X 10.4: Network Preferences 334 CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer’s IP Address For dynamically assigned settings, select Using DHCP from the Configure IPv4 list in the TCP/IP tab. Figure 165 Mac OS X 10.4: Network Preferences > TCP/IP Tab. For statically assigned settings, do the following: • From the Configure IPv4 list, select Manually. • In the IP Address field, type your IP address. • In the Subnet Mask field, type your subnet mask. CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 335 Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer’s IP Address • In the Router field, type the IP address of your device. Figure 166 Mac OS X 10.4: Network Preferences > Ethernet Click Apply Now and close the window. Verifying Settings Check your TCP/IP properties by clicking Applications > Utilities > Network Utilities, and then selecting the appropriate Network Interface from the Info tab. Figure 167 Mac OS X 10.4: Network Utility 336 CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer’s IP Address Mac OS X: 10.5 and 10.6 The screens in this section are from Mac OS X 10.5 but can also apply to 10.6. Click Apple > System Preferences. Figure 168 Mac OS X 10.5: Apple Menu In System Preferences, click the Network icon. Figure 169 Mac OS X 10.5: Systems Preferences CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 337 Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer’s IP Address When the Network preferences pane opens, select Ethernet from the list of available connection types. Figure 170 Mac OS X 10.5: Network Preferences > Ethernet From the Configure list, select Using DHCP for dynamically assigned settings. For statically assigned settings, do the following: • From the Configure list, select Manually. • In the IP Address field, enter your IP address. • In the Subnet Mask field, enter your subnet mask. 338 CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer’s IP Address • In the Router field, enter the IP address of your CellPipe 7130 RG. Figure 171 Mac OS X 10.5: Network Preferences > Ethernet Click Apply and close the window. CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 339 Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer’s IP Address Verifying Settings Check your TCP/IP properties by clicking Applications > Utilities > Network Utilities, and then selecting the appropriate Network interface from the Info tab. Figure 172 Mac OS X 10.5: Network Utility Linux: Ubuntu 8 (GNOME) This section shows you how to configure your computer’s TCP/IP settings in the GNU Object Model Environment (GNOME) using the Ubuntu 8 Linux distribution. The procedure, screens and file locations may vary depending on your specific distribution, release version, and individual configuration. The following screens use the default Ubuntu 8 installation. Note: Make sure you are logged in as the root administrator. Follow the steps below to configure your computer IP address in GNOME: 340 CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer’s IP Address Click System > Administration > Network. Figure 173 Ubuntu 8: System > Administration Menu When the Network Settings window opens, click Unlock to open the Authenticate window. (By default, the Unlock button is greyed out until clicked.) You cannot make changes to your configuration unless you first enter your admin password. Figure 174 Ubuntu 8: Network Settings > Connections CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 341 Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer’s IP Address In the Authenticate window, enter your admin account name and password then click the Authenticate button. Figure 175 Ubuntu 8: Administrator Account Authentication In the Network Settings window, select the connection that you want to configure, then click Properties. Figure 176 Ubuntu 8: Network Settings > Connections 342 CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer’s IP Address The Properties dialog box opens. Figure 177 Ubuntu 8: Network Settings > Properties • In the Configuration list, select Automatic Configuration (DHCP) if you have a dynamic IP address. • In the Configuration list, select Static IP address if you have a static IP address. Fill in the IP address, Subnet mask, and Gateway address fields. Click OK to save the changes and close the Properties dialog box and return to the Network Settings screen. CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 343 Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer’s IP Address If you know your DNS server IP address(es), click the DNS tab in the Network Settings window and then enter the DNS server information in the fields provided. Figure 178 Ubuntu 8: Network Settings > DNS Click the Close button to apply the changes. Verifying Settings Check your TCP/IP properties by clicking System > Administration > Network Tools, and then selecting the appropriate Network device from the Devices 344 CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer’s IP Address tab. The Interface Statistics column shows data if your connection is working properly. Figure 179 Ubuntu 8: Network Tools Linux: openSUSE 10.3 (KDE) This section shows you how to configure your computer’s TCP/IP settings in the K Desktop Environment (KDE) using the openSUSE 10.3 Linux distribution. The procedure, screens and file locations may vary depending on your specific distribution, release version, and individual configuration. The following screens use the default openSUSE 10.3 installation. Note: Make sure you are logged in as the root administrator. Follow the steps below to configure your computer IP address in the KDE: CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 345 Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer’s IP Address Click K Menu > Computer > Administrator Settings (YaST). Figure 180 openSUSE 10.3: K Menu > Computer Menu When the Run as Root - KDE su dialog opens, enter the admin password and click OK. Figure 181 openSUSE 10.3: K Menu > Computer Menu 346 CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer’s IP Address When the YaST Control Center window opens, select Network Devices and then click the Network Card icon. Figure 182 openSUSE 10.3: YaST Control Center When the Network Settings window opens, click the Overview tab, select the appropriate connection Name from the list, and then click the Configure button. Figure 183 openSUSE 10.3: Network Settings CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 347 Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer’s IP Address When the Network Card Setup window opens, click the Address tab Figure 184 openSUSE 10.3: Network Card Setup Select Dynamic Address (DHCP) if you have a dynamic IP address. Select Statically assigned IP Address if you have a static IP address. Fill in the IP address, Subnet mask, and Hostname fields. 348 Click Next to save the changes and close the Network Card Setup window. CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer’s IP Address If you know your DNS server IP address(es), click the Hostname/DNS tab in Network Settings and then enter the DNS server information in the fields provided. Figure 185 openSUSE 10.3: Network Settings Click Finish to save your settings and close the window. Verifying Settings Click the KNetwork Manager icon on the Task bar to check your TCP/IP properties. From the Options sub-menu, select Show Connection Information. Figure 186 openSUSE 10.3: KNetwork Manager CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 349 Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer’s IP Address When the Connection Status - KNetwork Manager window opens, click the Statistics tab to see if your connection is working properly. Figure 187 openSUSE: Connection Status - KNetwork Manager 350 CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide APPENDIX Pop-up Windows, JavaScripts and Java Permissions In order to use the web configurator you need to allow: • Web browser pop-up windows from your device. • JavaScripts (enabled by default). • Java permissions (enabled by default). Note: Internet Explorer 6 screens are used here. Screens for other Internet Explorer versions may vary. Internet Explorer Pop-up Blockers You may have to disable pop-up blocking to log into your device. Either disable pop-up blocking (enabled by default in Windows XP SP (Service Pack) 2) or allow pop-up blocking and create an exception for your device’s IP address. Disable Pop-up Blockers In Internet Explorer, select Tools, Pop-up Blocker and then select Turn Off Pop-up Blocker. Figure 188 Pop-up Blocker You can also check if pop-up blocking is disabled in the Pop-up Blocker section in the Privacy tab. CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 351 Appendix C Pop-up Windows, JavaScripts and Java Permissions In Internet Explorer, select Tools, Internet Options, Privacy. Clear the Block pop-ups check box in the Pop-up Blocker section of the screen. This disables any web pop-up blockers you may have enabled. Figure 189 Internet Options: Privacy Click Apply to save this setting. Enable Pop-up Blockers with Exceptions Alternatively, if you only want to allow pop-up windows from your device, see the following steps. 352 In Internet Explorer, select Tools, Internet Options and then the Privacy tab. CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide Appendix C Pop-up Windows, JavaScripts and Java Permissions Select Settings…to open the Pop-up Blocker Settings screen. Figure 190 Internet Options: Privacy Type the IP address of your device (the web page that you do not want to have blocked) with the prefix “http://”. For example, http://192.168.1.1. CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 353 Appendix C Pop-up Windows, JavaScripts and Java Permissions Click Add to move the IP address to the list of Allowed sites. Figure 191 Pop-up Blocker Settings Click Close to return to the Privacy screen. Click Apply to save this setting. JavaScripts If pages of the web configurator do not display properly in Internet Explorer, check that JavaScripts are allowed. 354 CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide Appendix C Pop-up Windows, JavaScripts and Java Permissions In Internet Explorer, click Tools, Internet Options and then the Security tab. Figure 192 Internet Options: Security Click the Custom Level... button. Scroll down to Scripting. Under Active scripting make sure that Enable is selected (the default). Under Scripting of Java applets make sure that Enable is selected (the default). CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 355 Appendix C Pop-up Windows, JavaScripts and Java Permissions Click OK to close the window. Figure 193 Security Settings - Java Scripting Java Permissions 356 From Internet Explorer, click Tools, Internet Options and then the Security tab. Click the Custom Level... button. Scroll down to Microsoft VM. Under Java permissions make sure that a safety level is selected. CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide Appendix C Pop-up Windows, JavaScripts and Java Permissions Click OK to close the window. Figure 194 Security Settings - Java JAVA (Sun) From Internet Explorer, click Tools, Internet Options and then the Advanced tab. Make sure that Use Java 2 for
Source Exif Data:
File Type : PDF File Type Extension : pdf MIME Type : application/pdf PDF Version : 1.6 Linearized : No XMP Toolkit : Adobe XMP Core 4.0-c316 44.253921, Sun Oct 01 2006 17:14:39 Modify Date : 2010:05:14 14:55:31+08:00 Create Date : 2010:05:12 15:49:29+08:00 Metadata Date : 2010:05:14 14:55:31+08:00 Document ID : uuid:e5fda9b7-4ef3-4812-9f97-ef1954d71fc5 Instance ID : uuid:caf9a011-3ad9-4d6a-b1b1-b4c2db3738f3 Format : application/pdf Page Count : 404 Author : 13508 Creator : FrameMaker 7.1 Producer : Acrobat Distiller 6.0.1 (Windows) Title : ZyBook2.bookEXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools